[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025223300A1 - Communication method and apparatus - Google Patents

Communication method and apparatus

Info

Publication number
WO2025223300A1
WO2025223300A1 PCT/CN2025/089598 CN2025089598W WO2025223300A1 WO 2025223300 A1 WO2025223300 A1 WO 2025223300A1 CN 2025089598 W CN2025089598 W CN 2025089598W WO 2025223300 A1 WO2025223300 A1 WO 2025223300A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
terminal
information
cell
ran node
measurement
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/CN2025/089598
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
李俊
李雪茹
何泓利
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Publication of WO2025223300A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025223300A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/08Reselecting an access point
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W36/00Hand-off or reselection arrangements
    • H04W36/24Reselection being triggered by specific parameters
    • H04W36/32Reselection being triggered by specific parameters by location or mobility data, e.g. speed data

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to communication methods and apparatus.
  • Radio Access Network (RAN) node configures measurement parameters for the terminal.
  • the terminal can then perform measurements based on these parameters, obtain the results, and send them to the RAN node. If the RAN node determines, based on the measurement results, that the signal quality of a neighboring cell is better than that of the serving cell, it can allow the terminal to switch to the neighboring cell with the better signal quality.
  • This handover mechanism relies primarily on the RAN node configuring measurement parameters for the terminal and determining whether to perform a cell handover based on the terminal's measurement results. This approach lacks flexibility and fails to meet user needs.
  • This application provides a communication method and apparatus that can flexibly perform cell handover to meet user needs.
  • core network element can refer to the core network element itself, or to processors, circuits, modules, logic nodes, chips, or chip systems within the core network element that implement the method.
  • the core network element can be a sensing function (SF) network element.
  • SF sensing function
  • the method includes: a core network element sensing a change in at least one of the terminal's location or the terminal's speed, and sending terminal status information to the terminal or a RAN node.
  • the terminal status information indicates a change in at least one of the terminal's location or the terminal's speed, and is used to determine measurement information for cell handover.
  • the core network element senses a change in at least one of the terminal's position or its movement speed, and sends terminal status information to the terminal or RAN node.
  • This enables the terminal or RAN node to determine the measurement information for cell handover based on the change in the terminal's position or movement speed. Therefore, the problem of unreasonable measurement parameter configuration caused by terminal movement can be avoided, allowing for more flexible terminal handover, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs.
  • the measurement information includes at least one of the following: measurement period information, parameter information of the measurement event, or first indication information, where the first indication information indicates whether to stop the measurement.
  • the measurement period can be understood as the time difference between two adjacent measurements by the terminal during periodic measurement.
  • the parameters of the measurement event can be: serving cell signal quality, threshold corresponding to the serving cell, neighboring cell signal quality, threshold corresponding to the neighboring cell, setting or triggering time of the offset where the neighboring cell signal quality is higher than the serving cell signal quality, etc.
  • the measurement information when the measurement information includes measurement cycle information, the measurement information can be used to determine the measurement cycle information of the terminal, thereby flexibly adjusting the frequency of the terminal's measurement; when the measurement information includes parameter information of the measurement event, the measurement information can be used to determine the parameters of the terminal's measurement event, enabling the terminal to adjust the parameters of the measurement event in a timely manner, thereby enabling better measurement; when the measurement information includes first indication information, it can indicate whether the terminal should stop measuring, thereby instructing the terminal to start measuring when the terminal can perform measurement but does not, or causing the terminal to stop measuring when the terminal can stop measuring, reducing unnecessary measurement behavior of the terminal and saving terminal power consumption.
  • the method further includes: receiving first information from a RAN node; the first information indicates coverage information of a cell managed by the RAN node, the cell managed by the RAN node including a first cell, the first cell being the serving cell of the terminal, or a neighboring cell of the serving cell.
  • core network elements can sense whether the terminal's location or speed has changed based on the coverage information of the cell managed by the RAN node indicated by the first information. For example, core network elements can construct a perception map based on the first information and determine at least one of the terminal's location or speed through the perception map.
  • the method further includes: constructing a perception map based on the first information, the perception map being used to determine at least one of the terminal's position or the terminal's speed of motion.
  • core network elements can determine at least one of the terminal's location or the terminal's movement speed through the constructed perception map, thereby being able to determine the terminal's state information based on this change.
  • a change in the terminal's location includes at least one of the following: the terminal moves from the center of a cell to the edge of the cell; the terminal moves from the edge of a cell to the center of the cell; the terminal leaves the coverage area of the serving cell; the terminal enters a first area; or the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell changes; wherein the first area is covered by multiple cells.
  • a change in the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell can be understood as a change in the terminal's serving cell, for example, some cells are removed from the management range of the RAN node, or the number of cells managed by the RAN node increases.
  • the terminal or RAN node determines the terminal's measurement parameters based on the change in the terminal's location, so that the terminal can switch in a timely manner.
  • the terminal accesses the cell and the signal quality received by the terminal from the cell becomes increasingly better, enabling the terminal or the RAN node to stop the terminal from measuring or to determine the terminal's measurement parameters, etc.
  • the terminal or RAN node can subsequently instruct the terminal to switch in a timely manner, avoiding situations such as the terminal failing to send test reports due to poor signal quality caused by leaving the cell coverage area.
  • the terminal or RAN node can determine the terminal's measurement parameters to avoid problems such as ping-pong handover.
  • the terminal or RAN node can update the terminal's measurement target, enabling the terminal to perform measurements normally.
  • the terminal's location is relative to the cell managed by the RAN node.
  • core network elements can determine terminal status information based on the relative position of the terminal and the cell managed by the RAN node, thereby determining the measurement information used for cell handover.
  • network node can refer to the network node itself, or to a processor, circuit, module, logic node, chip, or chip system within the network node that implements the method.
  • the network node can be a terminal or a RAN node.
  • the method includes: a network node acquiring terminal status information sensed by the network side, and determining measurement information for cell handover based on the terminal status information.
  • the terminal status information indicates a change in at least one of the terminal's location or its speed.
  • the network node can determine the measurement information for cell handover based on information indicating a change in at least one of the terminal's location or movement speed sensed by the network side. Therefore, this method can avoid the problem of unreasonable measurement parameter configuration caused by terminal movement, thereby enabling more flexible terminal handover, improving communication quality, and meeting user needs.
  • the measurement information includes at least one of the following: measurement period information, parameter information of the measurement event, or first indication information, wherein the first indication information indicates whether to stop the measurement.
  • the measurement period can be understood as the time difference between two adjacent measurements by the terminal during periodic measurement.
  • the parameters of the measurement event can be: serving cell signal quality, threshold corresponding to the serving cell, neighboring cell signal quality, threshold corresponding to the neighboring cell, setting or triggering time of the offset where the neighboring cell signal quality is higher than the serving cell signal quality, etc.
  • the measurement cycle information can be adjusted for the terminal, thereby flexibly adjusting the frequency of the terminal's measurement; when the measurement information includes parameter information of the measurement event, the parameters of the measurement event can be adjusted for the terminal, enabling the terminal to adjust the parameters of the measurement event in a timely manner, thereby enabling better measurement; when the measurement information includes first indication information, it can indicate whether the terminal should stop measuring, thereby instructing the terminal to start measuring when the terminal can perform measurement but does not, or causing the terminal to stop measuring when the terminal can stop measuring, reducing unnecessary measurement behavior of the terminal and saving terminal power consumption.
  • obtaining terminal status information perceived by the network side includes: receiving terminal status information from core network elements.
  • These core network elements can be network elements with sensing capabilities within the core network.
  • network nodes can obtain the terminal's status information from the core network, and then determine the measurement information for cell handover based on the terminal's status information, thereby avoiding the problem of unreasonable measurement parameter configuration caused by the movement of the terminal, and enabling the terminal to handover more flexibly.
  • the method further includes sending a second message to the terminal, the second message indicating determined measurement information for cell handover.
  • the second information can indicate the measurement information for cell handover to the terminal so that the terminal can update the measurement information in a timely manner, thereby avoiding the problem of unreasonable measurement parameter configuration caused by the movement of the terminal and allowing the terminal to handover more flexibly.
  • a change in the terminal's location includes at least one of the following: the terminal moves from the center of a cell to the edge of the cell; the terminal moves from the edge of a cell to the center of the cell; the terminal leaves the coverage area of the serving cell; the terminal enters a first area; or the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell changes; wherein the first area is covered by multiple cells.
  • a change in the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell can be understood as a change in the terminal's serving cell, for example, some cells are removed from the management range of the RAN node, or the number of cells managed by the RAN node increases.
  • the terminal or RAN node can determine the measurement parameters of the terminal in a timely manner so that the terminal can switch in time.
  • the terminal or the RAN node can instruct the terminal to stop measuring or determine the terminal's measurement parameters, etc.
  • the terminal or the RAN node can enable the terminal to switch in a timely manner to avoid situations such as the terminal failing to send test reports due to poor signal quality caused by leaving the cell coverage area.
  • the terminal or RAN node can determine the measurement parameters to avoid problems such as ping-pong handover.
  • the RAN node can update the terminal's measurement targets, enabling the terminal to perform measurements normally.
  • the terminal's location is relative to the cell managed by the RAN node.
  • core network elements can determine terminal status information based on the relative position of the terminal and the cell managed by the RAN node, thereby determining the measurement information used for cell handover.
  • the terminal state information includes the terminal's identifier.
  • the RAN node After the RAN node obtains the terminal status information, it can determine the terminal to which the cell measurement information for handover needs to be determined based on the terminal identifier.
  • core network element can refer to the core network element itself, or to processors, circuits, modules, logic nodes, chips, or chip systems within the core network element that implement the method. This method is applied to core network elements.
  • a core network element can be an SF network element.
  • the method includes: a core network element receiving cell handover information from a first RAN node, determining the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell, and sending first information to the first RAN node based on the cell handover information and the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell.
  • the first information is used by the terminal to perform cell handover.
  • the cell handover information includes condition information for handing the terminal to the first cell.
  • the core network element can determine whether to hand over the terminal to the first cell based on the terminal's signal quality for the first cell and the conditions for handing over the terminal to the first cell. Therefore, this method can flexibly manage terminal mobility and avoids the current problem of potentially unreasonable measurement parameters configured in RAN nodes due to terminal movement. It allows for more flexible terminal handover, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs.
  • determining the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell includes: determining the location of the terminal, and determining the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell based on the location of the terminal and the coverage information of the first cell.
  • the core network elements can more conveniently and quickly determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell by using the location of the terminal and the coverage information of the first cell, thereby determining the first information for the terminal to perform cell handover.
  • the method further includes: receiving second information from a second RAN node; the second information is used to indicate coverage information of a cell managed by the second RAN node, the cell managed by the second RAN node including the first cell.
  • the core network element can determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell based on the coverage information of the cell managed by the second RAN node.
  • the method further includes: constructing a perception map based on the second information, the perception map being used to determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell.
  • core network elements can use the second information to construct a perception map, determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell in the form of the perception map, and then combine the condition information for switching the terminal to the first cell to determine whether to switch the terminal to the first cell. This allows for more flexible switching of the terminal, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: first indication information, information about the signal quality or measurement events of the terminal for the first cell; the first indication information instructs the terminal to switch to the first cell.
  • the measurement events can be A1-A5 measurement events or B1-B2 measurement events.
  • the first information when the first information includes first indication information, it can be used to instruct the terminal to switch to the first cell.
  • the receiving device of the first information e.g., the first RAN node
  • the receiving device of the first information can obtain the terminal's signal quality for the first cell at this time and determine subsequent management of the terminal's behavior based on the signal quality.
  • the measurement event is determined based on the location of the terminal.
  • core network elements can determine the measurement events that the terminal should report more quickly and accurately according to the terminal's location.
  • the terminal's location is the relative position of the terminal to the cell managed by the first RAN node and/or the second RAN node.
  • the core network element can determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell according to the relative position of the terminal and the cell managed by the RAN node, and then determine whether to switch the terminal to the first cell, thereby enabling the terminal to switch more flexibly.
  • a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a first RAN node.
  • the first RAN node can refer to the first RAN node itself, or to a processor, circuit, module, logic node, chip, or chip system within the first RAN node that implements the method. This method is applied to the first RAN node.
  • the method includes: a first RAN node sending cell handover information to a core network element, receiving first information from the core network element, and determining whether to hand over the terminal to the first cell based on the first information.
  • the cell handover information includes conditional information for handing the terminal to the first cell.
  • the first information indicates that the terminal should be handed over to the first cell, and is determined based on the cell handover information and the signal quality of the terminal relative to the first cell as determined by the core network element.
  • the core network element can determine whether to hand over the terminal to the first cell based on the signal quality of the terminal relative to the first cell, combined with the conditional information for handing over the terminal to the first cell. Therefore, this method can flexibly manage terminal mobility and avoids the current problem of potentially unreasonable measurement parameters configured by the RAN node due to terminal movement. It allows for more flexible terminal handover, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs.
  • the above method further includes: sending third information to the core network element; the third information is used to indicate the coverage information of the cell managed by the first RAN node.
  • the third information can enable the core network element to determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell based on the coverage information of the cell managed by the first RAN node.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: first indication information, information about the signal quality or measurement events of the terminal for the first cell; the first indication information instructing the terminal to switch to the first cell.
  • the first information when the first information includes first indication information, it can be used to instruct the terminal to switch to the first cell.
  • the first information includes information about the terminal's signal quality or measurement events for the first cell, it can enable the first RAN node to obtain the terminal's signal quality for the first cell at this time and determine subsequent management of the terminal's behavior based on the signal quality.
  • a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a second RAN node.
  • the second RAN node can refer to the second RAN node itself, or to a processor, circuit, module, logic node, chip, or chip system within the second RAN node that implements the method.
  • the method includes: a second RAN node sending first information to a first RAN node.
  • the first information indicates at least one of the following: a first beam of a first cell or a timing advance of the terminal relative to the first RAN node.
  • the cells managed by the first RAN node include the first cell, which is the target cell for terminal handover.
  • the first beam is used for communication with the first cell after handover, and the timing advance is used for uplink synchronization after handover.
  • the first information is determined based on second information, which includes at least one of the following: the terminal's measurement results of the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's speed.
  • the second RAN node can determine the first beam based on at least one of the terminal's measurement results of the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's movement speed, and/or the timing advance information used by the terminal when switching to the first cell managed by the first RAN node.
  • This allows the first RAN node to communicate with the terminal through the first beam, determining a suitable beam without beam alignment, thus reducing handover latency.
  • the terminal can quickly achieve uplink synchronization with the first RAN node, thereby quickly switching to the first cell and significantly reducing handover latency. Therefore, the above method effectively reduces handover latency, allows for more flexible handover, improves communication quality, and meets user needs.
  • the method further includes: acquiring sensing information, which includes the terminal's location information, or the sensing information includes the terminal's location information and the terminal's movement speed.
  • the first beam can be determined by obtaining the terminal's location information, or by sensing information including the terminal's location information and the terminal's movement speed, and/or by obtaining the timing advance information that the terminal will use when switching to the first cell managed by the first RAN node. This allows the first RAN node to communicate with the terminal through the first beam and determine the appropriate beam without beam alignment, thereby reducing the handover latency of the terminal.
  • the method further includes receiving third information from the first RAN node, the third information indicating a first timing advance; the multiple timing advances include the first timing advance.
  • the reference point can refer to a point in time or a location.
  • any one of the multiple first beams corresponds to a reference point in the first cell.
  • the reference point can refer to a point in time or a location.
  • the first RAN node needs to utilize different beams to receive signals transmitted by terminals in different locations. Therefore, multiple timing advances corresponding to different reference points can be used to indicate the first beam that terminals at different reference points will use.
  • the method further includes: constructing a perception map based on the coverage information of the cell managed by the first RAN node; using the perception map to determine at least one of the terminal's location or the terminal's movement speed; and determining one or more of the first beam or timing advance based on the perception map.
  • the second RAN node can obtain the coverage information of the cells managed by the first RAN node to construct a perception map, determine the first beam and/or timing advance based on the perception map, thereby enabling the first RAN node to communicate with the terminal using the first beam, determine the appropriate beam without beam alignment, and reduce handover latency.
  • the method further includes receiving fourth information from a core network element, the fourth information indicating at least one of the following: a first beam or timing advance.
  • the second RAN node can obtain the first beam or timing advance from the core network element through the fourth information.
  • the terminal's location is the relative position of the terminal to the cell managed by the first RAN node.
  • the second RAN node can determine the first information according to the relative position of the terminal and the cell managed by the RAN node, thereby determining the first beam of the first cell or the timing advance of the terminal for the first RAN node.
  • the method further includes receiving a measurement result from the terminal. This measurement result can be used as sensing information.
  • the second RAN node can obtain the terminal's location information based on the terminal's measurement results, or the sensing information includes the terminal's location information and the terminal's movement speed.
  • the first information is carried in the handover request message.
  • the second RAN node can indicate the first beam of the first cell or the timing advance of the terminal to the first RAN node through a handover request message.
  • a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a first RAN node.
  • the first RAN node can refer to the first RAN node itself, or to a processor, circuit, module, logic node, chip, or chip system within the first RAN node that implements the method.
  • the method includes: receiving first information, and communicating with the terminal according to the first information after the terminal switches to a first cell.
  • the first information indicates at least one of the following: a first beam of the first cell or a timing advance of the terminal for a first RAN node; wherein the cells managed by the first RAN node include the first cell, the first cell is the target cell for the terminal switching, the first beam is used for communication with the terminal after switching to the first cell, the timing advance is used for uplink synchronization after switching to the first cell, and the first information is determined based on second information, which includes at least one of the following: the terminal's measurement results of the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's movement speed.
  • the first RAN node can communicate with the terminal according to the first beam indicated by the first information, thereby determining a suitable beam without beam alignment, thus reducing handover latency.
  • the timing advance indicated by the first information can also be given to the terminal, enabling the terminal to quickly achieve uplink synchronization with the first RAN node after acquiring the timing advance, and thus quickly hand over to the first cell, significantly reducing terminal handover latency. Therefore, the above methods can effectively reduce handover latency, allow for more flexible handover by the terminal, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs.
  • the first information indicates the first beam
  • communicating with the terminal based on the first information includes: communicating with the terminal via the first beam.
  • the first RAN node can communicate with the terminal through the first beam indicated by the first information, and can determine the appropriate beam without beam alignment, thus reducing handover latency.
  • receiving the first information includes: receiving the first information from the second RAN node or a core network element.
  • the first RAN node can obtain the first information through the second RAN node or core network element to obtain at least one of the first beam of the first cell or the timing advance of the terminal for the first RAN node.
  • the method further includes sending third information indicating a first timing advance; the multiple timing advances include the first timing advance.
  • the reference point can refer to a point in time or a location.
  • the first timing advance enables the terminal to perform uplink synchronization with the first RAN node without needing to acquire the timing advance additionally, thereby reducing handover latency.
  • the terminal since the terminal may be in different locations at different times, multiple timing advances can be used to correspond to different reference points, indicating the timing advance that the terminal at different reference points will use.
  • any one of the multiple first beams corresponds to a reference point in the first cell.
  • the reference point can refer to a point in time or a location.
  • the first RAN node needs to utilize different beams to receive signals transmitted by terminals in different locations. Therefore, multiple timing advances corresponding to different reference points can be used to indicate the first beam that terminals at different reference points will use.
  • the terminal's location is the relative position of the terminal to the cell managed by the first RAN node.
  • the first information can be determined according to the relative position of the terminal and the cell managed by the first RAN node.
  • the first information is carried in the handover request message.
  • the first RAN node can obtain the first information from the handover request message, and then obtain the first beam of the first cell or the timing advance of the terminal for the first RAN node.
  • a communication device for implementing the above-described method.
  • This communication device can be a core network element in the first aspect; or, it can be a network node in the second aspect; or, it can be a core network element in the third aspect; or, it can be a first RAN node in the fourth aspect; or, it can be a second RAN node in the fifth aspect; or, it can be a first RAN node in the sixth aspect.
  • the communication device includes modules, units, or means corresponding to the above-described method. These modules, units, or means can be implemented in hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software.
  • the hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above-described functions.
  • the communication device may include a processing module and an interface module.
  • the processing module can be used to implement the processing functions in any of the above aspects and their possible implementations.
  • the processing module may be, for example, a processor.
  • the interface module also called an interface unit, is used to implement the sending and/or receiving functions in any of the above aspects and their possible implementations.
  • the interface module may consist of an interface circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver unit, or a communication interface.
  • the interface module includes a sending module and a receiving module, which are used to implement the sending and receiving functions in any of the above aspects and any possible implementations.
  • a communication device comprising: a processor; configured to cause the communication device to perform the method described in any of the preceding aspects by executing a computer program (or computer-executable instructions) stored in a memory, and/or by means of logic circuitry.
  • the communication device may be a core network element in the first aspect; or, the communication device may be a network node in the second aspect; or, the communication device may be a core network element in the third aspect; or, the communication device may be a first RAN node in the fourth aspect; or, the communication device may be a second RAN node in the fifth aspect; or, the communication device may be a first RAN node in the sixth aspect.
  • the number of processors may be one or more.
  • the communication device also includes a memory.
  • the processor and memory are integrated together; or, the memory is independent of the processor.
  • the communication device further includes a communication interface for communicating with other devices, such as transmitting or receiving data and/or signals.
  • the communication interface may be a transceiver, circuit, bus, module, or other type of communication interface.
  • the processor and/or memory also include an artificial intelligence (AI) module for implementing AI-related functions.
  • AI artificial intelligence
  • the AI module can implement AI functions through software, hardware, or a combination of both.
  • the AI module includes a radio access network (RAN) intelligent controller (RIC) module.
  • RAN radio access network
  • RIC radio access network intelligent controller
  • the AI module can be a near real-time RIC or a non-real-time RIC.
  • the communication device is a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication device when it is a chip system, it can be composed of chips or may include chips and other discrete components.
  • a ninth aspect provides a communication device, comprising: a processor and an interface circuit; the interface circuit being configured to receive a computer program or instructions and transmit them to the processor; the processor being configured to execute the computer program or instructions to cause the communication device to perform the method described in any of the preceding aspects.
  • the communication device may be a core network element as described in the first aspect; or, the communication device may be a network node as described in the second aspect; or, the communication device may be a core network element as described in the third aspect; or, the communication device may be a first RAN node as described in the fourth aspect; or, the communication device may be a second RAN node as described in the fifth aspect; or, the communication device may be a first RAN node as described in the sixth aspect.
  • the number of processors may be one or more.
  • the processor also includes an AI module for implementing AI-related functions.
  • the AI module can implement AI functions through software, hardware, or a combination of both.
  • the AI module may include a RIC module.
  • the AI module could be a near real-time RIC or a non-real-time RIC.
  • the communication device is a chip or a chip system.
  • the communication device when it is a chip system, it can be composed of chips or may include chips and other discrete components.
  • a computer-readable storage medium which stores instructions that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the methods described in any of the preceding aspects.
  • a computer program product containing instructions is provided, which, when run on a computer, enables the computer to perform the methods described in any of the preceding aspects.
  • a communication system including a core network element for performing the method described in the first aspect above, and a network node for performing the method described in the second aspect above.
  • a communication system including a core network element for performing the method described in the third aspect above, and a first RAN node for performing the method described in the fourth aspect above.
  • a communication system including a second RAN node for performing the method described in the fifth aspect above, and a first RAN node for performing the method described in the sixth aspect above.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of the process of inter-station handover of the terminal provided in this application;
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the communication system architecture provided in this application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of the communication device provided in this application.
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart illustrating the communication method provided in this application.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of the communication method provided in this application (II).
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart illustrating the communication method provided in this application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of the communication device provided in this application.
  • RAN nodes can configure terminals to perform measurements to obtain measurement information from the terminals. Furthermore, RAN nodes can configure the measurement reporting type of the terminals to obtain the desired type of terminal measurement results.
  • the measurement reporting type can include measurement event type, periodic reporting type, cell global identifier (CGI) type, or system frame number and frame timing difference (SFTD) type.
  • CGI cell global identifier
  • SFTD system frame number and frame timing difference
  • the RAN node can configure at least one measurement target (distinguished by different measurement target IDs), and each measurement target corresponds to at least one measurement configuration (distinguished by different measurement configuration IDs).
  • a measurement identifier (measID) associates the measurement target ID and the measurement configuration ID.
  • the RAN node uses a reconfiguration message to instruct the terminal to perform measurements.
  • the reconfiguration message can include the measurement target and the measurement configuration, and the measurement configuration is the configuration corresponding to the measurement event.
  • a description of the measurement event configuration is provided below.
  • the measurement configuration can be specific parameters for measuring the measurement target, such as measurement thresholds. It should be understood that other types of measurement reporting types are similar and will not be elaborated further.
  • the terminal can perform measurements on the configured measurement targets according to the measurement configuration. For measurement targets that meet the measurement configuration conditions, a measurement report is reported, including the corresponding measurement identifier.
  • the RAN node can configure the measurement target using the ⁇ measObjectNR ⁇ cell.
  • the configuration includes the frequency points of the synchronization signal and PBCH block (SSB) or channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) to be measured.
  • the configuration may also include at least one of the following: a neighboring cell measurement list, reference signal configuration (e.g., time-frequency resource configuration), measurement gap, and measurement period.
  • SSB frequency point it may also include parameters such as the SSB band number or sub-carrier space (SCS).
  • SCS sub-carrier space
  • the configuration includes the CSI-RS frequency point, it may also include parameters such as the CSI-RS band number or SCS.
  • each measurement target corresponds to at least one measurement configuration.
  • the content configured in a measurement configuration includes: a measurement event identifier (event ID, for example, including A1 ⁇ A6 and B1 ⁇ B2, etc.).
  • the content configured in a measurement configuration also includes at least one of the following parameters: the measurement threshold, measurement offset, hysteresis, or trigger time (timeToTrigger) corresponding to the measurement event.
  • Ms represents the terminal's measurement result of the serving cell
  • Mn represents the terminal's measurement result of the neighboring cell
  • Hys represents the amplitude hysteresis of the measurement result (amplitude hysteresis can be understood as the influence of the measurement result of the previous moment on the measurement result of the next moment, i.e., trailing).
  • Ms or Mn can be the reference signal receiving power (RSRP) or reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ), etc.
  • timeToTrigger represents the duration for which the event entry condition is continuously met, i.e., time hysteresis (time hysteresis can be understood as the duration).
  • Thresh corresponding to events A1, A2, and A4 can represent thresholds
  • Thresh1 and Thresh2 corresponding to event A5 can represent threshold 1 and threshold 2, respectively.
  • Ofs corresponding to event A3 represents the frequency offset of the serving cell
  • Ofn represents the frequency offset of the neighboring cell.
  • Ocs represents the cell individual offset (CIO) of the serving cell
  • Ocn represents the cell offset (CIO) of the neighboring cell
  • Off represents the offset of the measurement result.
  • the threshold corresponding to the measurement event will be referred to as the "measurement threshold”.
  • the terminal can send a measurement report to the RAN node, which may include the measurement target ID and measurement configuration ID corresponding to the A2 event, so as to indicate to the RAN node that the terminal has met the measurement event corresponding to the measurement configuration ID for the measurement target.
  • the RAN node configures measurement parameters for the terminal, enabling the terminal to perform measurements based on these parameters and report the measurements. Based on the measurement reports reported by the terminal, the RAN node can then allow the terminal to switch to a neighboring cell with a better signal.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • RAN node 1 is the source node for the terminal's cell handover
  • RAN node 2 is the target node for the terminal's cell handover.
  • the source node can be understood as the RAN node to which the source cell of the terminal's cell handover belongs
  • the target node can be understood as the RAN node to which the target cell of the terminal's cell handover belongs.
  • the method shown in Figure 1 may include the following steps:
  • RAN node 1 sends a reconfiguration (measurement configuration) message to the terminal.
  • the terminal receives the reconfiguration (measurement configuration) message from RAN node 1.
  • This reconfiguration message may include information about the measurement target and measurement configuration, as detailed above.
  • S102 The terminal sends a measurement report to RAN node 1.
  • RAN node 1 receives the measurement report from the terminal.
  • the terminal can perform measurements according to the measurement configuration configured in the reconfiguration message. For instance, taking a reconfiguration message that includes measurement target 1, measurement reporting type as measurement event type, measurement event A3, and the measurement configuration corresponding to measurement event A3, the measurement configuration corresponding to measurement event A3 includes parameters such as the threshold for A3, the offset value where the neighboring cell signal quality is higher than the serving cell signal quality, and timeToTrigger (refer to the explanation of the parameters in Table 1; the threshold for A3 corresponds to Thresh in Table 1, the offset corresponds to Off in Table 1, and timeToTrigger corresponds to timeToTrigger in Table 1).
  • RAN Node 1 sends a handover request to RAN Node 2.
  • RAN Node 2 receives the handover request from RAN Node 1.
  • RAN node 1 determines the target node (e.g., RAN node 2) to which the target cell belongs for the terminal based on measurement reports and network-side resources.
  • target node e.g., RAN node 2
  • RAN Node 2 sends a handover confirmation to RAN Node 1.
  • RAN Node 1 receives the handover confirmation from RAN Node 2.
  • the handover confirmation includes information about the radio resources that the terminal will use after switching to RAN node 2.
  • RAN node 1 sends a reconfiguration (switching) message to the terminal.
  • the terminal receives the reconfiguration (switching) message from RAN node 1.
  • the reconfiguration message instructs the terminal to switch to the target cell (managed by RAN node 2), and includes information on the radio resources that the terminal will use after switching to the target cell.
  • S106 The terminal initiates random access to RAN node 2.
  • the terminal performs random access to perform time alignment (TA) with RAN Node 2 and then completes uplink synchronization with RAN Node 2. After successfully completing random access, the terminal can also send a reconfiguration complete (RRCReconfigurationComplete) message to RAN Node 2 to indicate a successful handover.
  • TA time alignment
  • RRCReconfigurationComplete reconfiguration complete
  • the RAN node primarily configures measurement parameters for the terminal, and determines whether the terminal should perform a cell handover based on the measurement results.
  • terminals are mobile, and their location and/or movement state constantly change. Therefore, the measurement parameters configured by the RAN node may no longer be suitable for terminals whose location and/or movement state have changed.
  • the measurement results may not easily meet the entry conditions for the corresponding handover measurement event (e.g., A2 or A3 events, etc.) (see the third column "Entry Conditions" in Table 1 for details), making it difficult for the terminal to report measurement reports and thus hindering timely cell handover.
  • handover may occur only after the terminal has left a suitable cell, affecting the terminal's communication quality.
  • the measurement threshold may become inappropriate.
  • an inappropriate setting of the measurement threshold or timeToTrigger may cause ping-pong handover (i.e., the terminal repeatedly switches between two cells).
  • the handover may fail due to excessive handover latency.
  • the current handover mechanism lacks flexibility and fails to meet user needs.
  • this application provides three communication methods, which are described in detail below.
  • Method 1 The core network element senses a change in at least one of the terminal's position or its speed and sends terminal status information to the terminal or RAN node. Accordingly, upon receiving the terminal's status information, the terminal or RAN node can determine the measurement information needed for cell handover based on the terminal's status information.
  • the aforementioned terminal status information indicates a change in at least one of the terminal's position or its speed.
  • core network elements can sense changes in the terminal's position or speed and indicate these changes to the terminal or RAN node via terminal status information. This allows the terminal or RAN node to determine the measurement parameters for handover based on the changes in the terminal's position or speed. Compared to the current method where the RAN node configures terminal measurement parameters and the terminal reports measurement data to trigger handover, this method allows the terminal or RAN node to manage terminal mobility based on its position or speed. This avoids the problem of potentially inappropriate measurement parameter configuration due to terminal movement, enabling more flexible handover and thus improving communication quality to meet user needs.
  • the specific process of Method 1 will be described in detail in the method shown in Figure 4 below.
  • Method 2 The first RAN node sends cell handover information to the core network element.
  • This cell handover information includes condition information for handing the terminal to the first cell.
  • the core network element receives the cell handover information from the first RAN node, determines the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell, and, based on the cell handover information and the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell, sends first information to the first RAN node, indicating that the terminal should be handed to the first cell.
  • the first RAN node receives the first information.
  • the core network element can determine whether to hand over the terminal to the first cell based on the terminal's signal quality for the first cell and the conditions for handing over the terminal to the first cell. Therefore, this method can flexibly manage terminal mobility and avoids the current problem of potentially unreasonable measurement parameters configured in the RAN nodes due to terminal movement. It allows for more flexible terminal handover, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs.
  • the specific process of Method 2 will be described in detail in the method shown in Figure 5 below.
  • Method 3 The second RAN node sends first information to the first RAN node.
  • the first RAN node receives the first information from the second RAN node.
  • This first information indicates at least one of the following: a first beam of the first cell or a timing advance of the terminal relative to the first RAN node.
  • the cells managed by the first RAN node include the first cell, which is the target cell for the terminal's handover.
  • the first beam is used for communication with the first cell after the terminal hands over, and the timing advance is used for uplink synchronization after the terminal hands over to the first cell.
  • the first information is determined based on second information, which includes at least one of the following: the terminal's measurement results of the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's movement speed.
  • the second RAN node can determine the first beam based on at least one of the terminal's measurement results of the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's movement speed, and/or the timing advance information used by the terminal when switching to the first cell managed by the first RAN node.
  • the first RAN node can communicate with the terminal through the first beam and determine a suitable beam without beam alignment, thereby reducing handover latency.
  • the terminal can quickly achieve uplink synchronization with the first RAN node and quickly switch to the first cell, significantly reducing handover latency. Therefore, the above method effectively reduces handover latency, allows for more flexible handover, improves communication quality, and meets user needs.
  • the specific process of method 3 will be described in detail in the method shown in Figure 6 below.
  • the communication system can be a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) system, a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, a 5G communication system, a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) system, a 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) related communication system, a communication system evolved after 5G (such as a 6th generation (6G) communication system), or a system integrating multiple systems, etc., without limitation.
  • UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • 5G communication system a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) system
  • 3GPP 3rd Generation Partnership Project
  • 5G can also be referred to as New Radio (NR).
  • NR New Radio
  • the method provided in this application is described below using the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2 as an example.
  • Figure 2 is only a schematic diagram and does not constitute a limitation on the applicable scenarios of the technical solution provided in this application.
  • FIG. 2 shows a schematic diagram of the architecture of the communication system 20 provided in this application.
  • the communication system 20 includes a RAN 201.
  • the communication system 20 also includes a core network (CN) 204.
  • RAN 201 includes at least one RAN node (202a and 202b in Figure 2, collectively referred to as 202) and at least one terminal (203a-203j in Figure 2, collectively referred to as 203).
  • RAN 201 may also include other RAN nodes, such as wireless relay devices and/or wireless backhaul devices (not shown in Figure 2).
  • Terminal 203 is wirelessly connected to RAN node 202.
  • RAN node 202 is wirelessly or wiredly connected to core network 204.
  • the core network equipment in core network 204 and RAN node 202 in RAN 201 can be different physical devices, or they can be the same physical device integrating core network logical functions and RAN logical functions.
  • RAN 201 can be a 3GPP-related cellular system, such as a 4G or 5G mobile communication system, or a future-oriented evolution system (such as a 6G mobile communication system).
  • RAN 201 can also be an open access network (O-RAN or ORAN), a cloud radio access network (CRAN), or a WiFi system.
  • RAN 201 can also be a communication system integrating two or more of the above systems.
  • the core network can include network elements used to implement various core network functions, such as SF network elements.
  • SF network elements also known as sensing network elements, can perform tasks such as selecting sensing devices (e.g., terminals or RAN nodes), controlling sensing services, receiving and integrating sensing measurement data, and outputting sensing results.
  • RAN node 202 sometimes also referred to as access network equipment, RAN entity, or access node, constitutes part of the communication system and is used to help terminals achieve wireless access.
  • Multiple RAN nodes 202 in the communication system 20 can be of the same type or different types.
  • a RAN node can be a base station, an evolved NodeB (eNodeB), an access point (AP), a transmission reception point (TRP), a next-generation NodeB (gNB), a next-generation base station in a 6G mobile communication system, a base station in a future mobile communication system, or an access node in a WiFi system.
  • a RAN node can be a macro base station (as shown in Figure 2, 220a), a micro base station or indoor station (as shown in Figure 2, 220b), a relay node or donor node, or a radio controller in a CRAN scenario.
  • a RAN node can also be a server, wearable device, vehicle, or in-vehicle equipment.
  • the access network equipment in vehicle-to-everything (V2X) technology can be a roadside unit (RSU).
  • RSU roadside unit
  • the roles of RAN node 220 and terminal 220 are relative.
  • a helicopter or drone that is usually configured as a terminal can also be configured as a mobile base station, and a device that accesses the RAN via a helicopter or drone is configured as a terminal.
  • RAN nodes collaborate to assist the terminal in achieving wireless access, with each RAN node performing a portion of the base station's functions.
  • RAN nodes can be central units (CUs), distributed units (DUs), CU-control plane (CPs), CU-user plane (UPs), or radio units (RUs).
  • CUs and DUs can be separate entities or included in the same network element, such as a baseband unit (BBU).
  • RUs can be included in radio frequency equipment or radio frequency units, such as remote radio units (RRUs), active antenna units (AAUs), or remote radio heads (RRHs).
  • RRUs remote radio units
  • AAUs active antenna units
  • RRHs remote radio heads
  • CU or CU-CP and CU-UP
  • DU or RU
  • RU may have different names, but those skilled in the art will understand their meaning.
  • CU can also be called O-CU (open CU)
  • DU can also be called O-DU
  • CU-CP can also be called O-CU-CP
  • CU-UP can also be called O-CU-UP
  • RU can also be called O-RU.
  • this application uses CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU, and RU as examples.
  • Any of the units among CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU, and RU in this application can be implemented through software modules, hardware modules, or a combination of software and hardware modules.
  • the terminal in this application is a device with wireless transceiver capabilities.
  • the terminal can be deployed on land, including indoors, outdoors, handheld, or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on water (such as on ships); and it can be deployed in the air (such as on airplanes, balloons, and satellites).
  • the terminal can also be referred to as a terminal device, which can be a user equipment (UE), a mobile station (MS), a mobile terminal (MT), or a device used to provide voice or data connectivity to users.
  • UE user equipment
  • MS mobile station
  • MT mobile terminal
  • the UE includes handheld devices with wireless communication capabilities, vehicle-mounted devices (e.g., cars, bicycles, electric vehicles, airplanes, ships, trains, high-speed trains, etc.), wearable devices (e.g., smartwatches, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc.), or computing devices.
  • vehicle-mounted devices e.g., cars, bicycles, electric vehicles, airplanes, ships, trains, high-speed trains, etc.
  • wearable devices e.g., smartwatches, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc.
  • computing devices e.g., a mobile phone, tablet computer, laptop computer, PDA, mobile internet device (MID), satellite terminal, or computer with wireless transceiver capabilities.
  • MID mobile internet device
  • UE can also be a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless modem, a point-of-sale (POS) machine, a customer-premises equipment (CPE), a smart robot, a robotic arm, workshop equipment, smart home devices (e.g., refrigerators, televisions, air conditioners, electricity meters, etc.), a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in autonomous driving, a wireless terminal in telemedicine, a wireless terminal in a smart grid, a wireless terminal in transportation safety, a wireless terminal in a smart city, a wireless terminal in a smart home, a vehicle-mounted terminal, a roadside unit (RSU) with terminal functionality, or a flying device (e.g., a smart robot, a hot air balloon, a drone, an airplane), etc.
  • a terminal can also be other devices with terminal functionality; for example, a terminal can also be a device that performs terminal functionality in D2D communication.
  • the terminal can be a wearable device.
  • Wearable devices also known as wearable smart devices, are a general term for devices that utilize wearable technology to intelligently design and develop everyday wearables, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing, and shoes.
  • Wearable devices are portable devices that are worn directly on the body or integrated into a user's clothing or accessories.
  • wearable devices are not merely hardware devices, but also devices that achieve powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction.
  • wearable smart devices include devices that are feature-rich, large in size, and can achieve complete or partial functions without relying on a smartphone, such as smartwatches or smart glasses, as well as devices that focus on only one type of application function and need to be used in conjunction with other devices such as smartphones, such as various smart bracelets and smart jewelry for vital sign monitoring.
  • the terminal can be a terminal in an Internet of Things (IoT) system.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • MTC machine-type communication
  • the terminal in this application can be an on-board module, on-board component, on-board chip, on-board unit (OBU), or telematics box (T-BOX) built into a vehicle as one or more components or units.
  • the vehicle can implement the methods of this application through the built-in on-board module, on-board component, on-board chip, on-board unit, or T-BOX.
  • the terminal can also be a complete vehicle device. Therefore, this application can be applied to vehicle networking, such as vehicle-to-everything (V2X), long-term evolution vehicle (LTE-V), and vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V).
  • V2X vehicle-to-everything
  • LTE-V long-term evolution vehicle
  • V2V vehicle-to-vehicle
  • the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2 is for illustrative purposes only and is not intended to limit the technical solutions of this application. Those skilled in the art should understand that in specific implementations, the communication system 20 may also include other devices, and the number of RAN nodes and terminals may be determined according to specific needs without limitation.
  • each network element or device (such as RAN node, terminal or core network element, etc.) in Figure 2 of this application may also be referred to as a communication device, which may be a general-purpose device or a special-purpose device. This application does not make specific limitations on this.
  • each network element or device e.g., RAN node 202, terminal 203, or core network element 204
  • the functions of each network element or device can be implemented by one device, multiple devices working together, or one or more functional modules within a single device.
  • This application does not impose specific limitations on these functions. It is understood that the aforementioned functions can be network elements in hardware devices, software functions running on dedicated hardware, a combination of hardware and software, or virtualization functions instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud platform).
  • each network element or device shown in Figure 2 can adopt the composition structure shown in Figure 3, or include the components shown in Figure 3.
  • Figure 3 shows a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a communication device applicable to this application.
  • the communication device 30 includes means of necessary forms such as modules, units, elements, circuits, or interfaces, which are appropriately configured together to execute the solution provided in this application.
  • the communication device 30 includes one or more processors 301 for implementing the method provided in this application.
  • Processor 301 can be a general-purpose processor or a dedicated processor.
  • processor 301 can be a baseband processor or a central processing unit (CPU).
  • the baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data, while the CPU can be used to control the communication device 30 (such as a RAN node, terminal, or chip), execute software programs, and process data from the software programs.
  • processor 301 may include program 305 (sometimes referred to as code or instructions), which can be run on processor 301 to cause the communication device 30 to perform the methods described in the following embodiments.
  • communication device 30 includes circuitry (not shown in FIG3) for implementing the terminal, RAN node, or core network element functions described in the following embodiments.
  • the communication device 30 may include one or more memories 303.
  • the memory 303 may be a read-only memory (ROM) or other type of static storage device capable of storing static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM), cache, or other type of dynamic storage device capable of storing information and instructions.
  • ROM read-only memory
  • RAM random access memory
  • cache or other type of dynamic storage device capable of storing information and instructions.
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read-only memory
  • CD-ROM compact disc read-only memory
  • optical disc storage including compressed optical discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital universal optical discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.
  • magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium capable of carrying or storing desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto.
  • the memory provided in this application may generally be non-volatile.
  • the memory 303 stores a program 307 (sometimes referred to as code or instructions), which can be run on the processor 301 to cause the communication device 30 to perform the methods described in the following method embodiments.
  • the processor 301 may include an AI module 306, and/or the memory 303 may include an AI module 308.
  • the aforementioned AI modules are used to implement AI-related functions.
  • the AI modules can be implemented through software, hardware, or a combination of both.
  • the AI module may include a RIC module.
  • the AI module can be a near real-time RIC or a non-real-time RIC.
  • data may also be stored in the processor 301 and/or the memory 303.
  • the processor 301 and the memory 303 may be configured separately or integrated together.
  • the communication device 30 may also include a transceiver 302 and/or an antenna 304.
  • the processor 301 sometimes referred to as a processing unit, controls the communication device 30.
  • the transceiver 302 sometimes referred to as a transceiver unit, transceiver, transceiver circuit, or transceiver, is used to realize the transmission and reception functions of the communication device 30 through the antenna 304.
  • composition shown in Figure 3 does not constitute a limitation on the communication device.
  • the communication device may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or have different component arrangements.
  • A/B can mean A or B.
  • “And/or” can be used to describe three relationships between the related objects.
  • a and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone.
  • a and B can be singular or plural.
  • expressions like "at least one of A, B, and C" or "at least one of A, B, or C” are generally used to indicate any of the following: A exists alone; B exists alone; C exists alone; A and B exist simultaneously; A and C exist simultaneously; B and C exist simultaneously; A, B, and C exist simultaneously.
  • the above examples using three elements (A, B, and C) illustrate the optional entries for this item. When the expression contains more elements, its meaning can be obtained according to the aforementioned rules.
  • first and second may be used to distinguish technical features with the same or similar functions.
  • the terms “first” and “second” do not limit the number or execution order, nor do they imply that they are necessarily different.
  • the terms “exemplary” or “for example” are used to indicate examples, illustrations, or descriptions. Any embodiment or design scheme described as “exemplary” or “for example” should not be construed as being more preferred or advantageous than other embodiments or design schemes.
  • the use of “exemplary” or “for example” is intended to present the relevant concepts in a concrete manner for ease of understanding.
  • for indicating can include direct and indirect indication, as well as explicit and implicit indication.
  • indication information When describing an indication information as being used to indicate A, it can include whether the indication information directly or indirectly indicates A, but does not necessarily mean that the indication information carries A.
  • the information indicated by a certain piece of information (such as the first indication information described below) is called the information to be indicated.
  • the information to be indicated In the specific implementation process, there are many ways to indicate the information to be indicated, such as, but not limited to, directly indicating the information to be indicated, such as the information to be indicated itself or its index. It can also indirectly indicate the information to be indicated by indicating other information, where there is a correlation between the other information and the information to be indicated.
  • the indication of specific information can be achieved by using a pre-agreed (e.g., protocol-defined) arrangement of various pieces of information, thereby reducing the indication overhead to some extent.
  • a pre-agreed e.g., protocol-defined
  • multiple can be understood as two or more.
  • multiple timing advances can be understood as two or more timing advances.
  • the core network element in the method provided in the following embodiments of this application can also be a chip, chip system, or processor that supports the core network element in implementing the method, or it can be a logical node, logical module, or software that can implement all or part of the core network element functions;
  • the RAN node in the method provided below in this application can also be a chip, chip system, or processor that supports the RAN node in implementing the method, or it can be a logical node, logical module, or software that can implement all or part of the RAN node functions;
  • the terminal in the method provided below in this application can also be a chip, chip system, or processor that supports the terminal in implementing the method, or it can be a logical node, logical module, or software that can implement all or part of the terminal functions.
  • a communication method provided in this application may include the following steps:
  • S401 At least one of the following changes: the position of the core network element sensing terminal or the speed of the terminal's movement.
  • the core network element can be the SF network element in the core network 204 of the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2.
  • the terminal can be any terminal in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2.
  • the location of the terminal mentioned above refers to its relative position to the cell managed by the RAN node. This relative position can be understood as the center or edge of a cell managed by the RAN node, or the boundary between different cells, etc., without limitation.
  • the RAN node is the RAN node connected to the terminal, such as RAN node 202 in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2.
  • the core network element repeatedly acquires the terminal's sensing information (e.g., the terminal's position or speed), compares the newly acquired terminal sensing information with the previously acquired terminal sensing information, and determines whether the terminal's position or speed has changed.
  • the terminal's sensing information e.g., the terminal's position or speed
  • the sensed information can be measurement information from the terminal, and the core network element obtains the terminal's sensed information based on the measurement information. For example, the core network element receives measurement information sent by the terminal, or it can receive measurement information reported by the RAN node from the terminal. The core network element can process the measurement information to obtain the sensed information.
  • the measurement information can include the physical cell identifier (PCI) of the terminal's serving cell or neighboring cells, as well as the signal quality of each cell or neighboring cell.
  • Core network elements can determine the terminal's location based on the PCI included in the measurement information reported by the terminal. For example, when the terminal reports an A1 measurement report (indicating that cell 1, as the serving cell, has good signal quality), it can be determined that the terminal is located at the center of cell 1.
  • the core network elements can determine that the terminal is located at the edge of cell 1 and cell 2, or even that the distance between the terminal and the center of cell 2 is closer than the distance between the terminal and the center of cell 1.
  • core network elements can use a perception map to sense the location or speed of a terminal. Specifically, core network elements can use the terminal's location information at different times on the perception map to determine whether the terminal's location has changed. Core network elements can use information such as the terminal's current speed presented on the perception map to determine whether the terminal's speed has changed. It should be understood that, in addition to the terminal's location and speed, the perception map also includes other geographic information, thereby enabling more convenient acquisition of the terminal's perception information.
  • the perception map can indicate the location of the terminal, the location of the RAN node, or the location of the cell managed by the RAN node
  • core network elements can obtain the relative position of the terminal and the RAN node, or the relative position of the terminal and the cell managed by the RAN node, through the perception map.
  • the core network element first obtains the terminal's perception information (e.g., the terminal's location or speed), then combines it with the location of the RAN node indicated by the perception map and the location of the cell managed by the RAN node, and then obtains the relative position of the terminal and the RAN node, or the relative position of the terminal and the cell managed by the RAN node.
  • the terminal's perception information e.g., the terminal's location or speed
  • the RAN node sends first information to the core network element.
  • the first information indicates the coverage information of the cells managed by the RAN node.
  • the cells managed by the RAN node include a first cell, which is the serving cell of the terminal or a neighboring cell of the serving cell.
  • the core network element can construct a perception map based on the first information. This perception map is used to determine at least one of the terminal's location or its movement speed. It is understood that, to improve the perception map, the core network element can also obtain coverage information of cells managed by RAN nodes other than the aforementioned RAN node, and the core network element can also obtain the perception results of any RAN node and/or any terminal regarding the aforementioned terminal.
  • the perception result of any RAN node regarding the terminal can be obtained by the RAN node through self-transmission and self-reception, or by other-transmission and self-reception.
  • the perception result of any terminal regarding the aforementioned terminal can be obtained by any terminal through self-transmission and self-reception, or by other-transmission and self-reception, or by sensing.
  • the coverage information mentioned above can indicate the coverage area of a cell managed by the RAN node.
  • the coverage information can indicate the center location of a cell managed by the RAN node, as well as the radius of the cell.
  • the coverage information can also indicate the shape of the cell coverage area (e.g., a circular or fan-shaped shape) or other types of information, without limitation.
  • S402 Core network elements send terminal status information to network nodes.
  • network nodes receive terminal status information from core network elements.
  • the network node can be a RAN node or a terminal.
  • the RAN node can be RAN node 202 in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2.
  • the terminal status information indicates a change in at least one of the terminal's position or its movement speed. For example, if the core network element senses a change in the terminal's position in S401, the terminal status information indicates that the terminal's position has changed. If the core network element senses a change in the terminal's movement speed in S401, the terminal status information indicates that the terminal's movement speed has changed. If both the core network element senses a change in the terminal's position and its movement speed in S401, the terminal status information indicates that both the terminal's position and its movement speed have changed.
  • core network elements can indicate changes in terminal position, speed, or both by carrying different information.
  • terminal status information may include two bits: a value of "01" indicates a change in terminal position; a value of "10” indicates a change in terminal speed; and a value of "11” indicates a change in both terminal position and speed.
  • the terminal status information may also additionally indicate other parameters characterizing speed changes, such as terminal acceleration, without limitation.
  • the terminal status information includes the terminal's identifier. Therefore, core network elements can use the terminal status information to specifically indicate to the RAN node which terminal has changed its location or speed, facilitating the RAN node to adjust measurement parameters for the terminal corresponding to that identifier.
  • the network node determines the measurement information used for cell handover based on the terminal status information.
  • the measurement information used for cell handover may include at least one of the following: measurement cycle information, parameter information of measurement events, or first indication information.
  • the first indication information indicates whether to stop measurement, or may include other parameters, such as trigger time, measurement threshold, or measurement interval.
  • the measurement cycle can be understood as the time difference between two adjacent measurements by the terminal during periodic measurement. The parameters of the measurement events are described in Table 1.
  • the terminal and RAN node determine the measurement information for cell handover based on the terminal's status information in a similar way.
  • the RAN node can also send the determined measurement information to the terminal, for example, by sending second information (optionally, this second information can be carried in an RRC reconfiguration message).
  • the second information can indicate the measurement information for cell handover determined by the RAN node.
  • the terminal can perform measurements based on this measurement information.
  • the second information may include at least one of the following: measurement cycle information, parameter information of measurement events, or first indication information.
  • the RAN node can define information elements corresponding to the first indication information to explicitly indicate whether the terminal should stop measurement, or implicitly indicate whether to stop measurement through reconfiguration information. For example, when the information element MeasIdToRemoveList includes measurement identifiers to be removed (corresponding to the aforementioned measID, where one measID is bound to a measurement target ID and a measurement configuration ID), if the measurement target ID corresponding to a certain measID corresponds to the serving cell or neighboring cell where the terminal is located, the terminal stops measurement. Conversely, if the MeasIdToAddModList cell contains the serving cell or neighboring cell corresponding to the measurement identifier to be added, the terminal begins measurement.
  • the information element MeasIdToRemoveList includes measurement identifiers to be removed (corresponding to the aforementioned measID, where one measID is bound to a measurement target ID and a measurement configuration ID)
  • the terminal stops measurement.
  • the MeasIdToAddModList cell contains
  • the measurement information is determined by the terminal itself, which adjusts the measurement information autonomously. This allows the terminal to directly determine the measurement information used for cell handover based on changes in its own position or speed, saving signaling overhead and latency caused by interaction with the RAN node.
  • the following uses a network node as an example to illustrate the specific process of determining the measurement information used for cell handover based on the terminal's state information.
  • the terminal status information also indicates a specific change in at least one of the terminal's position or its movement speed. For example, the terminal status information indicates the distance the terminal has moved in a certain direction, or how much the terminal's speed has increased or decreased.
  • network nodes determine the location of the terminal based on the terminal status information, and then determine the measurement information used for cell handover based on the location of the terminal.
  • terminal status information can indicate a change in the terminal's location, a change in its speed, or a change in both.
  • the network node determines the terminal's location differently based on the information, which will be explained in detail below.
  • Scenario 1 Terminal status information indicates that the terminal's location has changed.
  • network nodes can determine the location of a terminal based on the location changes indicated by the most recently acquired terminal location and terminal status information.
  • Scenario 2 Terminal status information indicates that the terminal's movement speed has changed.
  • network nodes can determine the terminal's travel distance based on the most recently acquired terminal speed, changes in the terminal's speed indicated by its status information, and a first time interval. Based on this travel distance, the terminal's location is determined by the most recently acquired position and direction of movement. The first time interval is the time between the moment the terminal most recently acquired its speed and the moment the core network sensed a change in the terminal's speed.
  • the core network element can determine the terminal's position at time t2. Furthermore, based on the obtained changes in the terminal's speed, the core network element can calculate the displacement traversed by the terminal after time t1, thereby determining the position at any time after time t1.
  • Terminal status information indicates changes in the terminal's position and speed of movement.
  • network nodes can determine the direction of the terminal's movement based on changes in the terminal's speed indicated by the terminal's status information, and determine the terminal's position based on the most recently acquired terminal position, the terminal's direction of movement, and changes in the terminal's position indicated by the terminal's status information.
  • core network elements can use the aforementioned changes to determine the location of the terminal in real time.
  • One possible design involves a change in terminal location that includes at least one of the following: the terminal moves from the center of a cell to the edge of the cell; the terminal moves from the edge of a cell to the center of the cell; the terminal leaves the coverage area of the serving cell; the terminal enters a first area; or the coverage area of the serving cell of the terminal changes.
  • the first area is covered by multiple cells.
  • a terminal's location changes, indicating it's moving from the center of a cell to its edge
  • the terminal receives the best signal quality when at the cell center and will connect to that cell; therefore, that cell is the terminal's serving cell.
  • the signal quality received from the serving cell gradually decreases, while the signal quality from other neighboring cells increases.
  • network nodes can allow the terminal to switch to neighboring cells with better signal quality. In this situation, the network node can adjust the terminal's measurement parameters.
  • the network node can enable the terminal's measurement.
  • the network node can configure a shorter measurement cycle for the terminal, allowing it to perform measurements more frequently to better capture changes in signal quality.
  • the network node can configure a longer duration for the measurement gap to encourage more measurements.
  • the network node can reduce the timeToTrigger for measurement events.
  • the network node can adjust the measurement threshold based on the terminal's neighbor cell deployment and its distance from the cell edge. For example, when the terminal is within the serving cell range, the threshold for measurement events (e.g., A2 or A3) can be increased to make handover less difficult; when the terminal is near the serving cell edge, the threshold can be decreased to make handover easier.
  • the threshold for measurement events e.g., A2 or A3
  • the terminal accesses the cell, and the signal quality received by the terminal from that cell improves.
  • the network node can then allow the terminal to stop measuring.
  • the network node can configure a longer measurement cycle for the terminal, i.e., reduce the terminal's measurement frequency.
  • the network node can configure a longer duration for the measurement gap.
  • the network node can also increase the threshold corresponding to measurement events (e.g., measurement events A2 or A3).
  • the network node can also increase the trigger time (timeToTrigger) corresponding to measurement events.
  • timeToTrigger time
  • the network node can trigger the terminal to switch in advance even if it has not received the corresponding measurement report. This can prevent situations such as the terminal failing to send measurement reports due to poor signal quality caused by leaving the cell's coverage area.
  • the terminal detects that the signal quality of the serving cell and neighboring cell 1 meets the conditions of measurement event A3, reports a measurement report, and can use neighboring cell 1 as the target cell and switch to neighboring cell 1 whether or not it receives a handover instruction from the RAN node. This enables timely handover and ensures the communication quality of the terminal.
  • the network node when the network node is a RAN node, the following process is described based on the terminal measurement report:
  • the terminal reports an A2 measurement report corresponding to threshold 1.
  • the terminal will continue to report an A2 measurement report corresponding to threshold 2 (threshold 2 is less than threshold 1).
  • the RAN node Upon receiving the A2 measurement report, the RAN node will configure an A3 measurement event for the terminal. If the terminal can be switched after reporting the A3 measurement event, the RAN node will switch the terminal to the target cell.
  • the RAN node can trigger the terminal switch. It can determine which cell the terminal has entered based on the direction of the terminal's movement, select a target cell for the terminal, and switch the terminal in advance. This achieves the purpose of flexibly triggering the terminal switch and simplifies the signaling process.
  • the RAN node can wait for the terminal's measurement report before handing over when it receives an indication that the terminal has left the coverage area of the serving cell.
  • the RAN node can also make it easier for the terminal to report measurement data by adjusting measurement parameters, such as reducing the trigger time (timeToTrigger) or the threshold for the measurement event.
  • timeToTrigger the trigger time
  • the specific adjustment values can be determined based on the relative position of the terminal and the cell and are not restricted.
  • this first area can be understood as an overlapping coverage area of multiple cells. Since the terminal may receive signals from multiple neighboring cells with similar signal quality when in this area, ping-pong handovers are likely to occur if the threshold for the measurement event corresponding to the handover is not increased. (Because even a small fluctuation in the signal quality of at least one of the aforementioned cells can lead to handover, frequent handovers occur, which not only increases the UE's measurement power consumption but also increases the load on the wireless network.) In this situation, network nodes can take measures such as increasing the trigger time (timeToTrigger) or increasing the threshold corresponding to the measurement event to avoid ping-pong handovers.
  • timeToTrigger increasing the trigger time
  • threshold corresponding to the measurement event to avoid ping-pong handovers.
  • a change in the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell can be understood as a change in the serving cell of the terminal.
  • some cells may be removed from the management range of the RAN node, or the number of cells managed by the RAN node may increase.
  • the network node when the network node is a RAN node, if the RAN node receives an updated RAN node list from the core network element (this information can be carried by the target gNB list cell), it means that some cells managed by the RAN node have changed (e.g., cells have been added or deleted). If the changed cell is a neighboring cell or a candidate neighboring cell of the terminal, it can be understood that the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell or neighboring cell has changed. In this case, the RAN node can update the terminal's measurement target (see the aforementioned introduction to measurement targets for details).
  • the network node when the network node is a RAN node, if the RAN node receives a target gNB list indicating that the number of cells managed by the RAN node or another RAN node has decreased, the RAN node will update the terminal's measurement information and delete the corresponding measurement target. Conversely, if the RAN node receives a target gNB list indicating that the number of cells managed by the RAN node or another RAN node has increased, the RAN node will update the terminal's measurement information and may add the corresponding measurement target. When the network node is a terminal, the terminal updates the information corresponding to the measurement target in its local context. Optionally, the terminal indicates the updated information corresponding to the measurement target to the RAN node.
  • the network node when the network node is a terminal, since information transmission between the core network elements and the terminal can be forwarded through the RAN node, for example, the RAN node forwards the terminal status information from the core network elements to the corresponding terminal via a downlink information transfer (DLInformationTransfer) message.
  • DLInformationTransfer downlink information transfer
  • core network elements can sense changes in the terminal's position or speed and indicate these changes to the terminal or RAN node via terminal status information. This allows the terminal or RAN node to determine the terminal's position and the measurement parameters for handover based on the changes in position or speed. Understandably, when the network node is the RAN node, since it manages the radio resources of multiple connected terminals, it can more rationally schedule and manage the radio resources of multiple terminals based on the sensed information (including information about changes in the terminal's position or speed) to determine the measurement information for cell handover. When the network node is the terminal, the terminal can autonomously adjust its measurement information based on its status.
  • the terminal Since the terminal is more aware of its own movement status (including changes in position or speed) than the RAN node, if the core network elements directly indicate the terminal's status information to the terminal, allowing the terminal to autonomously determine the measurement parameters, compared to the aforementioned method where the RAN node adjusts the terminal's measurement parameters, this saves the time the RAN node spends determining measurement information based on the terminal's status and sending secondary information. This allows for more efficient adjustment of the terminal's measurement parameters, ensuring more timely handover and switching to a suitable cell.
  • the above method allows the terminal or RAN node to manage terminal mobility based on the terminal's location. This avoids the problem of potentially inappropriate measurement parameter configuration due to terminal movement, thus enabling more flexible terminal handover, improving communication quality, and meeting user needs.
  • the device sensing changes in the terminal's position or speed is a core network element.
  • the RAN node can also sense changes used for cell handover.
  • the RAN node (which could be RAN node 202 in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2) can sense changes in the terminal's position or speed in a manner similar to that of the core network element in Figure 4, and determine measurement information for cell handover based on these changes.
  • the process by which the RAN node determines the measurement information for cell handover based on changes in the terminal's position or speed is similar to S403, and can be found in the corresponding description in S403.
  • the RAN node can also send second information to the terminal so that the terminal can perform measurements based on the second information.
  • the RAN node can sense changes in the terminal's position or speed in a manner similar to that of the core network element in Figure 4, and indicate these changes to the terminal so that the terminal can determine the measurement information for cell handover based on these changes and perform measurements based on this information.
  • a communication method provided in this application may include the following steps:
  • the first RAN node sends cell handover information to the core network element.
  • the core network element receives the cell handover information from the first RAN node.
  • the core network element can be any network element such as the SF network element in the core network 204 of the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2, without limitation.
  • the first RAN node can be any RAN node in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2, such as RAN node 202a or RAN node 202b.
  • the aforementioned cell handover information includes conditional information for handing over the terminal to the first cell. It should be understood that this conditional information may be information related to the handover measurement configuration, which includes specific parameters for measuring the target. The description of the measurement target or measurement configuration can be found in the preceding description and will not be repeated here.
  • the terminal may be terminal 203 communicating with RAN node 202 in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2.
  • S502 Core network elements determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell.
  • the core network element can determine the location of the terminal and, based on the terminal's location and the coverage information of the first cell, determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell.
  • the above process can be executed in real time by the core network element.
  • the terminal's location is its relative position to the cells managed by the first RAN node and/or the second RAN node.
  • the terminal may be located in the overlapping area of the cells managed by the first RAN node and the second RAN node.
  • the terminal may be located in the central area of the cell managed by the first RAN node.
  • the terminal may be located in the edge area of the cell managed by the second RAN node.
  • the second RAN node can be a different RAN node from the first RAN node in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2. For example, if the first RAN node is RAN node 202a, then the second RAN node is RAN node 202b; if the first RAN node is RAN node 202b, then the second RAN node is RAN node 202a.
  • core network elements can acquire terminal sensing information (e.g., terminal location or speed) multiple times, compare the updated terminal sensing information with known terminal sensing information to determine if the terminal's location or speed has changed. Based on this change, core network elements can determine the terminal's location and, based on the terminal's location and the coverage information of the first cell, determine the terminal's signal quality for the first cell.
  • terminal sensing information e.g., terminal location or speed
  • core network elements can use a perception map to obtain the signal quality of a terminal for a first cell.
  • the perception map can be used to determine the signal quality of a terminal for a first cell.
  • core network elements use the perception map to obtain the location of the terminal and the coverage information of the first cell, and determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell based on the location of the terminal and the coverage information of the first cell.
  • the core network element can determine the terminal's signal quality based on the terminal's location and the coverage information of the first cell. For example, the core network element can determine the signal transmission path between the terminal and the second RAN node managing the first cell based on the terminal's location and the coverage information of the first cell, and determine the terminal's signal quality based on this transmission path.
  • the perception map can also include environmental information near the terminal, such as the location and height of buildings, bridges, and other structures.
  • the transmission path of the signal transmitted between the second RAN node and the terminal can be determined based on information about buildings or other obstructions (e.g., the size of the obstruction), thereby determining the path loss and the terminal's received power (which can be understood as the terminal's signal quality for the first cell).
  • the locations of various objects in the perception map e.g., terminals, obstacles, or network devices such as RAN nodes
  • the core network element can also determine the transmission path between the first RAN node and the terminal according to the specific location and height of the antenna of the first RAN node and the environment near the terminal. Then, combined with the power of the signal transmitted by the first RAN node and the path loss, the receiving power of the terminal receiving the signal of the first cell can be determined, that is, the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell.
  • core network elements can construct a perception map.
  • core network elements can construct a perception map based on second and/or third information.
  • the methods by which core network elements obtain the second or third information are as follows:
  • the first RAN node sends third information to the core network element.
  • the core network element receives the third information from the first RAN node.
  • This third information is used to indicate the coverage information of the cells managed by the first RAN node.
  • the third information may indicate the coverage information of the cells managed by the first RAN node.
  • This coverage information may indicate the center location of the cells managed by the first RAN node, and the radius of the cells.
  • the coverage information may also indicate the shape of the coverage area of the cells managed by the first RAN node (e.g., a circular or fan-shaped shape) or other types of information, without limitation.
  • the third information may include the coverage information of at least one cell managed by the first RAN node.
  • the cells managed by the first RAN node include cell A
  • the coverage information of cell A may include: the latitude and longitude coordinates of the center of cell A, indication that cell A is circular, and indication that the radius of cell A is 1000 meters.
  • the second RAN node sends second information to the core network elements.
  • the core network elements receive the second information from the second RAN node.
  • This second information is used to indicate the coverage information of the cells managed by the second RAN node, including the first cell.
  • the second information may indicate the coverage information of the cells managed by the second RAN node, which may indicate the center location and radius of the cells.
  • the coverage information may also indicate the shape of the coverage area of the cells managed by the second RAN node (e.g., a circular or fan-shaped shape) or other types of information, without limitation.
  • the second information may include coverage information of at least one cell managed by the second RAN node.
  • the cell managed by the second RAN node includes cell B
  • the coverage information of cell B may include: the latitude and longitude coordinates of the center of cell B, indication that cell B is fan-shaped, and indication that cell B has a radius of 2000 meters.
  • core network elements can also acquire coverage information of cells managed by RAN nodes other than the first and second RAN nodes.
  • Core network elements can also acquire the perception results of any RAN node and/or any terminal regarding the aforementioned terminals.
  • the perception result of any RAN node regarding a terminal can be obtained by the RAN node through self-transmission and self-reception, or by a third party transmitting and receiving data.
  • the perception result of any terminal regarding the aforementioned terminals can be obtained by the terminal through self-transmission and self-reception, or by a third party transmitting and receiving data, or through sensor perception.
  • the core network element sends the first information to the first RAN node.
  • the first RAN node receives the first information from the core network element.
  • the first information is determined by the core network element based on cell handover information and the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell, and the first information is used by the terminal for cell handover.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: first indication information, which is information about the signal quality or measurement events of the terminal for the first cell.
  • the measurement events can be measurement events A1 to A5 or measurement events B1 to B2 as described in Table 1 above.
  • the aforementioned first indication information indicates that the terminal should be switched to the first cell.
  • the first information includes information about the measurement event, enabling the first RAN node to obtain the measurement event that the terminal meets at this time.
  • the first RAN node may send a message to the terminal based on this measurement event. For example, when the terminal reports A3, the first RAN node may send a message including a handover instruction to the terminal.
  • core network elements can determine whether a threshold corresponding to the measurement event is met based on the relative position of the terminal and the first cell. When the threshold is met, it is determined that the first information includes the measurement event.
  • the terminal measures the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell, or when the signal quality is different from the signal quality of the same cell included in the first information sent by the terminal last time
  • the first information includes the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell, so that the first RAN node can obtain the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell at this time, and the first RAN node can perform network optimization, etc. based on the signal quality.
  • the first information includes first indication information to indicate that the terminal should be handed over to the first cell.
  • the core network element can determine the relative position of the terminal and the cell based on the signal quality of the terminal relative to the first cell, and thus determine whether the terminal should perform a cell handover.
  • a terminal will typically experience different signal quality depending on its location within a cell.
  • RSRP Reference Ratio
  • the RSRP is greater than -80dBm
  • the RSRP value can range from -100dBm to -80dBm
  • the RSRP can be less than -100dBm.
  • the range of signal quality values is not limited to the above examples and can be adjusted according to the actual cell coverage; this application does not impose any limitations on this.
  • the core network element can determine first information based on this relative position and cell handover information. For example, when it is determined that the terminal is located at the cell edge, the target cell (e.g., the first cell) of the terminal is determined based on the terminal's position and direction of movement, and then the first information includes a handover command (e.g., first indication information, instructing the terminal to hand over to the first cell).
  • a handover command e.g., first indication information, instructing the terminal to hand over to the first cell.
  • the first RAN node determines whether to hand over the terminal to the first cell based on the first information. For example, when the first information includes first indication information, the first RAN node can instruct the terminal to hand over; for instance, the first RAN node sends a reconfiguration message to the terminal, which includes a command to hand over the terminal to the first cell. When the first information includes measurement event information, the first RAN node can update the terminal's measurement configuration or determine whether the terminal should hand over the cell based on the measurement event information.
  • the first RAN node can configure an A3 measurement event for the terminal to obtain the terminal's signal quality relative to neighboring cells.
  • the first information includes the terminal's signal quality relative to the first cell, if the signal quality is below a threshold, a terminal handover can be determined. If the signal quality is good (e.g., RSRP ⁇ -80dBm), the first RAN node can record the terminal's signal quality relative to the first cell, and this data can be used for network optimization.
  • the core network element can determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell according to the terminal's location. Combined with cell handover information, it can then determine whether the terminal should perform a cell handover. Therefore, this method enables the core network element to flexibly manage terminal mobility, allowing the terminal to handover more flexibly, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs.
  • a communication method provided in this application may include the following steps:
  • the second RAN node sends the first information to the first RAN node.
  • the first RAN node receives the first information from the second RAN node.
  • the first RAN node and the second RAN node can be different RAN nodes in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2. For example, if the first RAN node is RAN node 202a, then the second RAN node is RAN node 202b, and if the first RAN node is RAN node 202b, then the second RAN node is RAN node 202a.
  • the aforementioned first information indicates at least one of the following: the first beam of the first cell or the timing advance (TA) of the terminal to the first RAN node.
  • the cells managed by the first RAN node include the first cell, which is the target cell for terminal handover.
  • the first beam is used for communication between the terminal and the first cell after handover, and the timing advance is used for uplink synchronization after handover.
  • the terminal can be terminal 203 communicating with RAN node 202 in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2.
  • the target RAN node of the target cell to which the terminal is handover belongs is the first RAN node
  • the RAN node of the source cell to which the terminal is handover belongs is the second RAN node.
  • the first information is determined based on the second information, which includes at least one of the following: the terminal's measurement results of the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's movement speed.
  • the second RAN node can determine the terminal's location based on the second information, and then determine the first beam and/or the aforementioned timing advance based on the terminal's location.
  • the second RAN node can determine the first beam and the aforementioned timing advance according to the following two possible designs.
  • the first beam can be a receive beam used by the first RAN node for communication with the terminal.
  • the second RAN node acquires sensing information, which includes the terminal's location information, or the sensing information includes both the terminal's location information and its movement speed.
  • the second RAN node can receive measurement results from the terminal, which can be used as sensing information; or the second RAN node can sense the terminal, for example, through a self-transmitting and self-receiving method, and thus acquire sensing information; or the second RAN node can receive sensing information from core network elements.
  • This application does not limit the method of acquiring sensing information.
  • the second RAN node can determine the terminal's location through the terminal's location information or movement speed.
  • the receiving beam information used by the first RAN node after the terminal switches to the first cell managed by the first RAN node, including the direction of the receiving beam can be determined. It should be understood that for a mobile terminal, the receiving beam used by the first RAN node may be different at different times. Therefore, when the terminal is at different times or locations, the first RAN node can use the corresponding first beam to communicate with the terminal, thereby enabling the prediction of the first beam after the terminal hands over to the first cell. The appropriate beam can be determined without beam alignment between the terminal and the first RAN node, reducing handover latency.
  • the second RAN node can predict the terminal's location in real time, and then, for a period of time before the terminal hands over to the first cell, indicate to the first RAN node in real time the first beam that the first RAN node will use.
  • One possible design is that there are multiple timing advances, and any one of these timing advances corresponds to a reference point of the first cell.
  • the timing advance can be used for uplink synchronization between the terminal and the RAN node. Since the first cell is managed by the first RAN node, the terminal performs uplink synchronization with the first RAN node when handing over to the first cell. It should be understood that within the same system frame, the RAN node expects signals from different terminals to arrive at the RAN node receiver at aligned times. Because different terminals are at different distances from the RAN node, the time required for each terminal to send signals to the RAN node varies. Therefore, the alignment of the arrival times of signals from different terminals at the RAN node receiver may be affected by the distance between the terminal and the RAN node.
  • terminal A's signal A is expected to be received by the RAN node at time point 1 of subframe
  • terminal B's signal B is expected to be received by the RAN node at time point 2 of subframe.
  • the transmission time of signal A is too long, and signal A is only received by the RAN node at the time point of subframe 2, it will affect the RAN node's reception of signal B. Therefore, for example, for terminals far from the RAN node, a larger timing advance is set so that the system frame for sending uplink data is a certain time ahead of the corresponding downlink frame.
  • the terminal may be in different locations at different times. Multiple timing advances can be used to correspond to different reference points, indicating the timing advance that the terminal will use at different times (or different locations).
  • the second RAN node can predict the terminal's location in real time, and then, for a period of time before the terminal hands over to the first cell, indicate the timing advance that the terminal will use to the first RAN node in real time.
  • the second RAN node can determine the first beam or timing advance according to method 1 or method 2 below.
  • Method 1 The second RAN node determines the terminal's sensing information (e.g., the terminal's position or speed), and uses this sensing information to determine the first beam or timing advance.
  • the terminal's sensing information e.g., the terminal's position or speed
  • the second RAN node can construct a perception map.
  • the method by which the second RAN node constructs the perception map is similar to the method shown in Figure 4 or Figure 5, and will not be repeated here.
  • This perception map is used to determine at least one of the terminal's location or its speed, thereby facilitating the acquisition of the possible location the terminal might move to after switching to the first cell.
  • the changes in the terminal's location or speed can be represented.
  • the map also includes other geographical information (e.g., the location or height of obstructions in the terminal's surrounding environment).
  • the perception map can acquire the terminal's real-time location.
  • the second RAN node can predict multiple locations of the terminal after switching to the first cell based on the perception map, and then determine the information of the first beam corresponding to each location.
  • the information of the first beam includes the direction in which the second RAN node receives the beam, which can be represented by parameters such as the direction of arrival (DOA). Therefore, after the terminal switches to the first cell, the first RAN node can communicate with the terminal through the first beam.
  • DOA direction of arrival
  • the second RAN node can obtain the terminal's sensing information (e.g., the terminal's location or speed) from the core network elements and use this sensing information to determine the first beam or timing advance.
  • the terminal's sensing information e.g., the terminal's location or speed
  • the second RAN node can use a method similar to the above process to predict the location information that the terminal may move to after the terminal switches to the first cell, and determine the timing advance of the terminal at different locations based on the predicted location information. This timing advance is used for the terminal to perform uplink synchronization with the first RAN node.
  • the terminal's location refers to its relative position to the cell managed by the first RAN node.
  • the second RAN node can obtain the determined first beam or the aforementioned timing advance from an external source.
  • the second RAN node receives fourth information from the core network element, the fourth information indicating at least one of the following: a first beam or timing advance.
  • the core network element can be the SF network element of the core network 204 in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2.
  • the core network elements determine the first beam or timing advance based on sensing information.
  • the core network elements can also determine the first beam or timing advance using the sensing map; the specific process can be found in Method 1, and will not be elaborated further.
  • the first information is carried in the handover request message.
  • This handover request can be referred to in the description of S103.
  • the second RAN node can indicate a first beam to the first RAN node via the first information, so that the first RAN node can use the first beam to receive the terminal's signal after the terminal switches to the first cell.
  • the second RAN node can also indicate multiple timing advances to the first RAN node via the first information, and the first RAN node can select from the multiple timing advances according to the radio resource scheduling situation, for example, selecting a suitable timing advance from the multiple timing advances.
  • the second RAN node sends third information to the first RAN node.
  • the second RAN node receives the third information from the first RAN node, which indicates a first timing advance, and multiple timing advances include the first timing advance.
  • the third information may be a handover request confirmation message (refer to the description in S104).
  • the first RAN node can determine the timing advance used by the terminal after handover to the first cell, based on the radio resource scheduling situation on the RAN node side; this timing advance is more reliable.
  • the first RAN node can determine the first timing advance from these multiple timing advances based on the RAN node's radio resource scheduling information, and include the confirmed first timing advance in the third message, sending it to the second RAN node.
  • the second RAN node can indicate the first timing advance confirmed by the first RAN node to the terminal.
  • this first timing advance information can be included in an RRC reconfiguration message (containing a message about handover to the first cell), sent by the second RAN node to the terminal, which can then use this first timing advance for uplink synchronization during handover.
  • the first RAN node After the terminal switches to the first cell, the first RAN node communicates with the terminal based on the first information.
  • the first RAN node can use the first beam indicated by the first information to receive the terminal's signal.
  • the terminal can perform uplink synchronization with the first RAN node based on the first timing advance information.
  • the second RAN node can determine the terminal's location based on the sensing information, and thus determine the timing advance information needed for the terminal to switch to the first cell managed by the first RAN node. After obtaining this timing advance information, the terminal can quickly achieve uplink synchronization with the first RAN node, and then quickly switch to the first cell, thereby greatly reducing the terminal handover latency.
  • the first RAN node can also use the first beam indicated by the first information as the receiving beam, which will also greatly reduce latency compared to the current process of determining the receiving beam (usually the terminal sends signals with multiple beams, and the RAN node selects the beam with the highest received signal quality as the subsequent receiving beam). Therefore, the above method can effectively reduce handover latency, enable terminals to handover more flexibly, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs.
  • this application also provides a communication device, which can be the terminal in the above method embodiments, or a device containing the terminal, or a component usable in the terminal; or, the communication device can be the RAN node in the above method embodiments, or a device containing the RAN node, or a component usable in the RAN node; or, the communication device can be the core network element in the above method embodiments, or a device containing the core network element, or a component usable in the core network element.
  • the above-mentioned terminal, RAN node, or core network element, etc. include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function in order to achieve the above functions.
  • this application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed by hardware or by computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • This application can divide terminals, RAN nodes, or core network elements into functional modules based on the above method examples. For example, each function can be divided into its own functional module, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module.
  • the integrated module can be implemented in hardware or as a software functional module. It is understood that the module division in this application is illustrative and only represents one logical functional division; other division methods may be used in actual implementation.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic diagram of a communication device 70.
  • the communication device 70 includes a processing module 701 and an interface module 702.
  • the processing module 701 also called a processing unit, is used to perform operations other than transmission and reception; for example, it can be a processing circuit or a processor.
  • the communication device 70 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 7) for storing program instructions and data.
  • the communication device 70 may further include an AI module (not shown in FIG. 7) for implementing AI-related functions.
  • the AI module can implement AI functions through software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the AI module includes an RIC module.
  • the AI module and the storage module are integrated into one module, or the AI module and the interface module 702 are integrated into one module.
  • the communication device 70 is used to implement the functions of a core network element.
  • the communication device 70 is, for example, the core network element described in the embodiment shown in FIG4.
  • the processing module 701 is used to sense a change in at least one of the terminal's position or the terminal's movement speed.
  • the processing module 701 can be used to execute S401.
  • Interface module 702 is used to send terminal status information to the terminal or RAN node.
  • the terminal status information indicates a change in at least one of the terminal's position or its speed, and is used to determine measurement information for cell handover.
  • interface module 702 can be used to execute S402.
  • the measurement information includes at least one of the following: measurement cycle information, parameter information of the measurement event, or first indication information, wherein the first indication information indicates whether to stop the measurement.
  • the interface module 702 is further configured to receive first information from the RAN node.
  • the first information indicates coverage information of cells managed by the RAN node, including a first cell, which is either the serving cell of the terminal or a neighboring cell of the serving cell.
  • the processing module 701 is further configured to construct a perception map based on the first information, the perception map being used to determine at least one of the terminal's position or the terminal's movement speed.
  • a change in the terminal's location includes at least one of the following: the terminal moves from the center of a cell to the edge of the cell; the terminal moves from the edge of a cell to the center of the cell; the terminal leaves the coverage area of the serving cell; the terminal enters a first area; or the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell changes; wherein the first area is covered by multiple cells.
  • the terminal's location is relative to the cell managed by the RAN node.
  • the communication device 70 is used to implement the functions of a network node.
  • the communication device 70 is, for example, a network node in the embodiment shown in FIG4.
  • the network node may be a RAN node or a terminal.
  • the interface module 702 is used to acquire terminal status information sensed by the network side.
  • the terminal status information indicates a change in at least one of the terminal's location or its speed.
  • the interface module 702 can be used to execute S402.
  • the processing module 701 is used to determine measurement information for cell handover based on the terminal status information.
  • the processing module 701 can be used to execute S403.
  • the measurement information includes at least one of the following: measurement cycle information, parameter information of the measurement event, or first indication information, wherein the first indication information indicates whether to stop the measurement.
  • the interface module 702 is specifically used to receive terminal status information from core network elements.
  • the interface module 702 is further configured to send second information to the terminal, the second information indicating the determined measurement information for cell handover.
  • a change in the terminal's location includes at least one of the following: the terminal moves from the center of a cell to the edge of the cell; the terminal moves from the edge of a cell to the center of the cell; the terminal leaves the coverage area of the serving cell; the terminal enters a first area; or the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell changes; wherein the first area is covered by multiple cells.
  • the terminal's location is relative to the cell managed by the RAN node.
  • the terminal state information includes the terminal's identifier.
  • the communication device 70 is used to implement the functions of a core network element.
  • the communication device 70 is, for example, the core network element described in the embodiment shown in FIG5.
  • the interface module 702 is used to receive cell handover information from the first RAN node. This cell handover information includes conditions for handing the terminal to the first cell. For example, the interface module 702 can be used to execute S501.
  • Processing module 701 is used to determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell. For example, processing module 701 can be used to execute S502.
  • Interface module 702 is further configured to send first information to the first RAN node based on cell handover information and the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell.
  • the first information is used by the terminal to perform cell handover.
  • interface module 702 can be used to execute S503.
  • the processing module 701 is specifically used to determine the location of the terminal and determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell based on the location of the terminal and the coverage information of the first cell.
  • the interface module 702 is further configured to receive second information from the second RAN node.
  • the second information indicates coverage information of cells managed by the second RAN node, including the first cell.
  • the processing module 701 is further configured to construct a perception map based on the second information, the perception map being used to determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: first indication information, information about the signal quality or measurement events of the terminal for the first cell; the first indication information instructing the terminal to switch to the first cell.
  • the measurement event is determined based on the location of the terminal.
  • the terminal's location is the relative position of the terminal to the cell managed by the first RAN node and/or the second RAN node.
  • communication device 70 is used to implement the functions of a first RAN node.
  • Communication device 70 is, for example, the first RAN node of the embodiment shown in FIG5.
  • the interface module 702 is used to send cell handover information to the core network elements.
  • This cell handover information includes conditions for switching the terminal to the first cell.
  • the interface module 702 can be used to execute S501.
  • Interface module 702 is also used to receive first information from a core network element, the first information indicating that the terminal should be switched to a first cell, the first information being determined based on cell handover information and the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell as determined by the core network element.
  • interface module 702 can be used to execute S503.
  • the processing module 701 is used to determine whether to switch the terminal to the first cell based on the first information.
  • the interface module 702 is also used to send third information to the core network element; the third information is used to indicate the coverage information of the cell managed by the first RAN node.
  • the first information includes at least one of the following: first indication information, information about the signal quality or measurement events of the terminal for the first cell; the first indication information instructing the terminal to switch to the first cell.
  • the communication device 70 is used to implement the functions of the second RAN node.
  • the communication device 70 is, for example, the second RAN node described in the embodiment shown in FIG6.
  • Interface module 702 is used to send first information to the first RAN node.
  • the first information indicates at least one of the following: a first beam of the first cell or a timing advance of the terminal to the first RAN node.
  • the cells managed by the first RAN node include the first cell, which is the target cell for terminal handover.
  • the first beam is used for communication with the first cell after handover, and the timing advance is used for uplink synchronization after handover.
  • the first information is determined based on second information, which includes at least one of the following: the terminal's measurement result of the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's movement speed.
  • interface module 702 can be used to execute S601.
  • the interface module 702 is also used to acquire sensing information, which includes the terminal's location information, or the sensing information includes the terminal's location information and the terminal's movement speed.
  • the interface module 702 is also used to receive third information from the first RAN node, the third information indicating the first timing advance, and the multiple timing advances include the first timing advance.
  • any one of the multiple first beams corresponds to a reference point in the first cell.
  • processing module 701 is configured to construct a perception map based on coverage information of the cell managed by the first RAN node, the perception map being used to determine at least one of the terminal's location or the terminal's movement speed. Processing module 701 is also configured to determine one or more of a first beam or timing advance based on the perception map.
  • the interface module 702 is further configured to receive fourth information from the core network element, the fourth information indicating at least one of the following: a first beam or timing advance.
  • the terminal's location is the relative position of the terminal to the cell managed by the first RAN node.
  • the interface module 702 is also used to receive measurement results from the terminal.
  • the first information is carried in the handover request message.
  • communication device 70 is used to implement the functions of a first RAN node.
  • Communication device 70 is, for example, the first RAN node of the embodiment shown in FIG6.
  • Interface module 702 is used to receive first information.
  • the first information indicates at least one of the following: a first beam of a first cell or a timing advance of the terminal for a first RAN node.
  • the cells managed by the first RAN node include the first cell, which is the target cell for terminal handover.
  • the first beam is used for communication after the terminal hands over to the first cell, and the timing advance is used for uplink synchronization after the terminal hands over to the first cell.
  • the first information is determined based on second information, which includes at least one of the following: the terminal's measurement results for the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's movement speed.
  • interface module 702 can be used to execute S601.
  • the processing module 701 is used to communicate with the terminal based on the first information after the terminal switches to the first cell.
  • the interface module 702 can be used to execute S602.
  • the first information indicates the first beam
  • the processing module 701 is specifically used to communicate with the terminal through the first beam.
  • the interface module 702 is specifically used to receive first information from the second RAN node or core network element.
  • any one of the multiple timing advances corresponds to a reference point of the first cell.
  • the interface module 702 is also used to send third information, which indicates the first timing advance.
  • the multiple timing advances include the first timing advance.
  • any one of the multiple first beams corresponds to a reference point in the first cell.
  • the terminal's location is the relative position of the terminal to the cell managed by the first RAN node.
  • the first information is carried in the handover request message.
  • the communication device 70 can take the form shown in FIG3.
  • the processor 301 in FIG3 can invoke computer execution instructions stored in memory 303 to cause the communication device 70 to perform the methods described in the above embodiments.
  • the functions/implementation processes of the processing module 701 and interface module 702 in FIG7 can be implemented by the processor 301 in FIG3 calling computer execution instructions stored in memory 303.
  • the functions/implementation processes of the processing module 701 in FIG7 can be implemented by the processor 301 in FIG3 calling computer execution instructions stored in memory 303
  • the functions/implementation processes of the interface module 702 in FIG7 can be implemented by the transceiver 302 in FIG3.
  • the above modules or units can be implemented by software, hardware, or a combination of both.
  • the software exists as computer program instructions and is stored in memory.
  • the processor can be used to execute the program instructions and implement the above method flow.
  • the processor can be built into a system-on-a-chip (SoC) or ASIC, or it can be a separate semiconductor chip.
  • SoC system-on-a-chip
  • the processor may further include necessary hardware accelerators, such as field-programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), programmable logic devices (PLDs), or logic circuits that implement dedicated logic operations.
  • FPGAs field-programmable gate arrays
  • PLDs programmable logic devices
  • the hardware can be any one or any combination of a CPU, microprocessor, digital signal processing (DSP) chip, microcontroller unit (MCU), artificial intelligence processor, ASIC, SoC, FPGA, PLD, application-specific digital circuit, hardware accelerator, or non-integrated discrete device, which can run the necessary software or perform the above method flow independently of software.
  • DSP digital signal processing
  • MCU microcontroller unit
  • artificial intelligence processor ASIC, SoC, FPGA, PLD, application-specific digital circuit, hardware accelerator, or non-integrated discrete device, which can run the necessary software or perform the above method flow independently of software.
  • this application also provides a chip system, including: at least one processor and an interface, wherein the at least one processor is coupled to a memory via the interface, and when the at least one processor executes a computer program or instructions in the memory, the method in any of the above method embodiments is executed.
  • the chip system further includes a memory.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips or may include chips and other discrete devices; this application does not specifically limit this.
  • this application also provides a computer-readable storage medium. All or part of the processes in the above method embodiments can be implemented by a computer program instructing related hardware.
  • This program can be stored in the aforementioned computer-readable storage medium. When executed, the program can include the processes of the above method embodiments.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be an internal storage unit of the communication device in any of the foregoing embodiments, such as the hard disk or memory of the communication device.
  • the aforementioned computer-readable storage medium can also be an external storage device of the communication device, such as a plug-in hard disk, smart media card (SMC), secure digital (SD) card, flash card, etc., equipped on the communication device.
  • SMC smart media card
  • SD secure digital
  • the aforementioned computer-readable storage medium can include both internal storage units and external storage devices of the communication device.
  • the aforementioned computer-readable storage medium is used to store the aforementioned computer program and other programs and data required by the communication device.
  • the aforementioned computer-readable storage medium can also be used to temporarily store data that has been output or will be output.
  • this application also provides a computer program product. All or part of the processes in the above method embodiments can be executed by a computer program instructing related hardware.
  • This program can be stored in the above computer program product, and when executed, it can include the processes described in the above method embodiments.
  • this application also provides computer instructions. All or part of the processes in the above method embodiments can be executed by computer instructions instructing related hardware (such as computers, processors, terminals, RAN nodes, or core network elements).
  • the program can be stored in the aforementioned computer-readable storage medium or the aforementioned computer program product.
  • this application also provides a communication system, including: core network elements and network nodes as shown in Figure 4.
  • this application also provides a communication system, including: the core network element and the first RAN node in the method shown in Figure 5.
  • this application also provides a communication system, including: a first RAN node and a second RAN node as shown in the method of FIG6.
  • the disclosed apparatus and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the apparatus embodiments described above are merely illustrative; for instance, the division of modules or units is only a logical functional division, and in actual implementation, there may be other division methods.
  • multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another device, or some features may be ignored or not executed.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces; the indirect coupling or communication connection between devices or units may be electrical, mechanical, or other forms.
  • a component shown as a unit can be one or more physical units; that is, it can be located in one place or distributed in multiple different locations. Some or all of the units can be selected to achieve the purpose of this embodiment according to actual needs.
  • the functional units in the various embodiments of this application can be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit can exist physically separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
  • the integrated unit can be implemented in hardware or as a software functional unit.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present application relates to the technical field of communications, and provides a communication method and apparatus. In the method, a core network element can sense a change in at least one of the position of a terminal or the movement speed of the terminal, and indicates the change to a network node by means of terminal status information, wherein the network node may be the terminal or a RAN node. When the terminal status information is received, on the basis of change information of the position or movement speed of the terminal, the network node can determine measurement information for cell handover. Therefore, the problem of inappropriate measurement parameter configuration caused by the movement of the terminal can be avoided, allowing the terminal to perform handover more flexibly, thereby improving communication quality, and meeting user requirements.

Description

通信方法和装置Communication methods and devices

本申请要求于2024年4月26日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202410519529.8、申请名称为“通信方法和装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims priority to Chinese patent application No. 202410519529.8, filed with the State Intellectual Property Office of China on April 26, 2024, entitled "Communication Method and Apparatus", the entire contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.

技术领域Technical Field

本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及通信方法和装置。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to communication methods and apparatus.

背景技术Background Technology

目前,当终端处于无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)连接态时,随着终端的移动以及无线通信环境的变化,可能出现服务小区信号逐渐变差、相邻小区的信号逐渐变好的情况。此时,为了保证通信质量,无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)节点会为终端配置测量参数,终端就可以根据测量参数进行测量,获取测量结果,并将测量结果发送给RAN节点。如果RAN节点根据测量结果确定邻区的信号质量比服务小区的信号质量好,RAN节点可以让终端切换到信号质量较好的邻区。上述切换机制主要靠RAN节点为终端配置测量参数,根据终端的测量结果确定终端是否进行小区切换,灵活性较差,难以满足用户需求。Currently, when a terminal is in Radio Resource Control (RRC) connected state, as the terminal moves and the wireless communication environment changes, the signal of the serving cell may gradually deteriorate while the signal of neighboring cells may gradually improve. In this situation, to ensure communication quality, the Radio Access Network (RAN) node configures measurement parameters for the terminal. The terminal can then perform measurements based on these parameters, obtain the results, and send them to the RAN node. If the RAN node determines, based on the measurement results, that the signal quality of a neighboring cell is better than that of the serving cell, it can allow the terminal to switch to the neighboring cell with the better signal quality. This handover mechanism relies primarily on the RAN node configuring measurement parameters for the terminal and determining whether to perform a cell handover based on the terminal's measurement results. This approach lacks flexibility and fails to meet user needs.

发明内容Summary of the Invention

本申请提供通信方法和装置,可以灵活地进行小区切换,满足用户需求。This application provides a communication method and apparatus that can flexibly perform cell handover to meet user needs.

为达到上述目的,本申请的采用如下技术方案:To achieve the above objectives, this application adopts the following technical solution:

第一方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由核心网网元执行。这里的核心网网元既可以指核心网网元本身,也可以指核心网网元中实现该方法的处理器、电路、模块、逻辑节点、芯片、或芯片系统等。例如,核心网网元可以是感知功能(sensing function,SF)网元。Firstly, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by core network elements. Here, "core network element" can refer to the core network element itself, or to processors, circuits, modules, logic nodes, chips, or chip systems within the core network element that implement the method. For example, the core network element can be a sensing function (SF) network element.

该方法包括:核心网网元感知终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生变化,并向终端或RAN节点发送终端状态信息。其中,终端状态信息指示终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生变化,终端状态信息用于确定用于小区切换的测量信息。The method includes: a core network element sensing a change in at least one of the terminal's location or the terminal's speed, and sending terminal status information to the terminal or a RAN node. The terminal status information indicates a change in at least one of the terminal's location or the terminal's speed, and is used to determine measurement information for cell handover.

基于上述第一方面提供的方法,核心网网元通过感知终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生变化,向终端或RAN节点发送终端状态信息,使得终端或RAN节点能够根据终端位置或运动速度的变化信息确定用于小区切换的测量信息。因此,可以避免由于终端的移动造成测量参数配置不合理的问题,从而能够更灵活地让终端进行切换,进而提高通信质量,满足用户需求。在一种可能的实现方式中,测量信息包括以下至少一项:测量周期信息、测量事件的参数信息或第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示是否停止测量。其中,测量周期可以理解为周期性测量时,终端相邻两次测量之间的时间差。测量事件的参数可以是:服务小区信号质量、服务小区对应的门限、邻区信号质量、邻区对应的门限、邻区信号质量比服务小区信号质量高出的偏置的置或触发时间等。Based on the method provided in the first aspect above, the core network element senses a change in at least one of the terminal's position or its movement speed, and sends terminal status information to the terminal or RAN node. This enables the terminal or RAN node to determine the measurement information for cell handover based on the change in the terminal's position or movement speed. Therefore, the problem of unreasonable measurement parameter configuration caused by terminal movement can be avoided, allowing for more flexible terminal handover, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs. In one possible implementation, the measurement information includes at least one of the following: measurement period information, parameter information of the measurement event, or first indication information, where the first indication information indicates whether to stop the measurement. The measurement period can be understood as the time difference between two adjacent measurements by the terminal during periodic measurement. The parameters of the measurement event can be: serving cell signal quality, threshold corresponding to the serving cell, neighboring cell signal quality, threshold corresponding to the neighboring cell, setting or triggering time of the offset where the neighboring cell signal quality is higher than the serving cell signal quality, etc.

基于上述可能的实现方式,当测量信息包括测量周期信息时,测量信息可以用于确定终端的测量周期信息,从而灵活地调节终端进行测量的频率;当测量信息包括测量事件的参数信息时,测量信息可以用于确定终端的测量事件的参数,使终端能够及时调整测量事件的参数,从而能够更好地进行测量;当测量信息包括第一指示信息时,可以指示终端是否停止测量,从而可以在终端可以进行测量但未进行测量的情况下,指示终端开始测量,或者在终端可以不进行测量的情况下使终端停止测量,减少终端不必要的测量行为,节省终端功耗。Based on the above possible implementation methods, when the measurement information includes measurement cycle information, the measurement information can be used to determine the measurement cycle information of the terminal, thereby flexibly adjusting the frequency of the terminal's measurement; when the measurement information includes parameter information of the measurement event, the measurement information can be used to determine the parameters of the terminal's measurement event, enabling the terminal to adjust the parameters of the measurement event in a timely manner, thereby enabling better measurement; when the measurement information includes first indication information, it can indicate whether the terminal should stop measuring, thereby instructing the terminal to start measuring when the terminal can perform measurement but does not, or causing the terminal to stop measuring when the terminal can stop measuring, reducing unnecessary measurement behavior of the terminal and saving terminal power consumption.

在一种可能的实现方式中,上述方法还包括:接收来自RAN节点的第一信息;第一信息指示RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息,RAN节点管理的小区包括第一小区,第一小区为终端的服务小区,或者服务小区的邻区。In one possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving first information from a RAN node; the first information indicates coverage information of a cell managed by the RAN node, the cell managed by the RAN node including a first cell, the first cell being the serving cell of the terminal, or a neighboring cell of the serving cell.

基于上述可能的实现方式,核心网网元可以根据第一信息指示的RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息,感知终端的位置或运动速度是否发生变化。例如,核心网网元可以根据第一信息构建感知地图,通过感知地图确定终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项。Based on the above possible implementation methods, core network elements can sense whether the terminal's location or speed has changed based on the coverage information of the cell managed by the RAN node indicated by the first information. For example, core network elements can construct a perception map based on the first information and determine at least one of the terminal's location or speed through the perception map.

在一种可能的实现方式中,上述方法还包括:根据第一信息构建感知地图,感知地图用于确定终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项。In one possible implementation, the method further includes: constructing a perception map based on the first information, the perception map being used to determine at least one of the terminal's position or the terminal's speed of motion.

基于上述可能的实现方式,核心网网元可以通过构建后的感知地图确定终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项,从而能够根据该变化确定终端状态信息。Based on the above possible implementation methods, core network elements can determine at least one of the terminal's location or the terminal's movement speed through the constructed perception map, thereby being able to determine the terminal's state information based on this change.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端的位置发生变化包括以下至少一项:终端从一个小区的中心向小区的边缘移动,终端从一个小区的边缘向小区的中心移动,终端离开服务小区的覆盖范围,终端进入第一区域,或者,终端的服务小区的覆盖范围发生变化;其中,第一区域由多个小区覆盖。“终端的服务小区的覆盖范围发生变化”可以理解为终端的服务小区发生变化,例如,某些小区被移除RAN节点的管理范围,或者,RAN节点管理的小区增加。In one possible implementation, a change in the terminal's location includes at least one of the following: the terminal moves from the center of a cell to the edge of the cell; the terminal moves from the edge of a cell to the center of the cell; the terminal leaves the coverage area of the serving cell; the terminal enters a first area; or the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell changes; wherein the first area is covered by multiple cells. "A change in the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell" can be understood as a change in the terminal's serving cell, for example, some cells are removed from the management range of the RAN node, or the number of cells managed by the RAN node increases.

基于上述可能的实现方式,当终端的位置发生变化包括终端从一个小区的中心向小区的边缘移动时,表示终端接收到服务小区的信号质量逐渐变低,可以使得终端或RAN节点根据终端的位置的变化确定终端的测量参数,以使终端能够及时切换。Based on the above possible implementation methods, when the location of the terminal changes, including when the terminal moves from the center of a cell to the edge of the cell, it indicates that the signal quality received by the terminal from the serving cell is gradually decreasing. This allows the terminal or RAN node to determine the terminal's measurement parameters based on the change in the terminal's location, so that the terminal can switch in a timely manner.

或者,当终端的位置发生变化包括终端从一个小区的边缘向小区的中心移动时,终端接入该小区,且终端接收到该小区的信号质量越来越好,使得终端或RAN节点可以让终端停止测量或者确定终端的测量参数等。Alternatively, when the terminal's location changes, such as when the terminal moves from the edge of a cell to the center of the cell, the terminal accesses the cell and the signal quality received by the terminal from the cell becomes increasingly better, enabling the terminal or the RAN node to stop the terminal from measuring or to determine the terminal's measurement parameters, etc.

或者,当终端的位置发生变化包括终端离开服务小区的覆盖范围时,可以使得终端或RAN节点后续指示终端及时进行切换,避免终端因离开小区覆盖范围导致信号质量过差而发送测报失败等情况。Alternatively, when the location of the terminal changes, including when the terminal leaves the coverage area of the serving cell, the terminal or RAN node can subsequently instruct the terminal to switch in a timely manner, avoiding situations such as the terminal failing to send test reports due to poor signal quality caused by leaving the cell coverage area.

或者,当终端的位置发生变化包括终端进入第一区域时,可以使得终端或RAN节点能够确定终端的测量参数,以避免发生乒乓切换等问题。Alternatively, when the location of the terminal changes, including when the terminal enters the first area, the terminal or RAN node can determine the terminal's measurement parameters to avoid problems such as ping-pong handover.

或者,当终端的位置发生变化包括终端的服务小区的覆盖范围发生变化时,可以使得终端或RAN节点更新终端的测量目标,使终端正常进行测量。Alternatively, when the location of the terminal changes, including changes in the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell, the terminal or RAN node can update the terminal's measurement target, enabling the terminal to perform measurements normally.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端的位置为终端与RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置。In one possible implementation, the terminal's location is relative to the cell managed by the RAN node.

基于上述可能的实现方式,核心网网元可以根据终端与RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置确定终端状态信息,从而确定用于小区切换的测量信息。Based on the above possible implementation methods, core network elements can determine terminal status information based on the relative position of the terminal and the cell managed by the RAN node, thereby determining the measurement information used for cell handover.

第二方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由网络节点执行。这里的网络节点既可以指网络节点本身,也可以指网络节点中实现该方法的处理器、电路、模块、逻辑节点、芯片、或芯片系统等。其中,网络节点可以是终端或RAN节点。Secondly, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a network node. Here, "network node" can refer to the network node itself, or to a processor, circuit, module, logic node, chip, or chip system within the network node that implements the method. The network node can be a terminal or a RAN node.

该方法包括:网络节点获取网络侧感知的终端状态信息,并根据终端状态信息确定用于小区切换的测量信息。其中,终端状态信息指示终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生变化。The method includes: a network node acquiring terminal status information sensed by the network side, and determining measurement information for cell handover based on the terminal status information. The terminal status information indicates a change in at least one of the terminal's location or its speed.

基于上述第二方面提供的方法,网络节点能够根据网络侧感知的终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生变化的信息,确定用于小区切换的测量信息。因此,该方法可以避免由于终端的移动造成测量参数配置不合理的问题,从而能够更灵活地让终端进行切换,进而提高通信质量,满足用户需求。在一种可能的实现方式中,测量信息包括以下至少一项:测量周期信息、测量事件的参数信息或第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示是否停止测量。其中,测量周期可以理解为周期性测量时,终端相邻两次测量之间的时间差。测量事件的参数可以是:服务小区信号质量、服务小区对应的门限、邻区信号质量、邻区对应的门限、邻区信号质量比服务小区信号质量高出的偏置的置或触发时间等。Based on the method provided in the second aspect above, the network node can determine the measurement information for cell handover based on information indicating a change in at least one of the terminal's location or movement speed sensed by the network side. Therefore, this method can avoid the problem of unreasonable measurement parameter configuration caused by terminal movement, thereby enabling more flexible terminal handover, improving communication quality, and meeting user needs. In one possible implementation, the measurement information includes at least one of the following: measurement period information, parameter information of the measurement event, or first indication information, wherein the first indication information indicates whether to stop the measurement. The measurement period can be understood as the time difference between two adjacent measurements by the terminal during periodic measurement. The parameters of the measurement event can be: serving cell signal quality, threshold corresponding to the serving cell, neighboring cell signal quality, threshold corresponding to the neighboring cell, setting or triggering time of the offset where the neighboring cell signal quality is higher than the serving cell signal quality, etc.

基于上述可能的实现方式,当测量信息包括测量周期信息时,可以为终端调节测量周期信息,从而灵活地调节终端进行测量的频率;当测量信息包括测量事件的参数信息时,可以为终端调节测量事件的参数,使终端能够及时调整测量事件的参数,从而能够更好地进行测量;当测量信息包括第一指示信息时,能够指示终端是否停止测量,从而可以在终端可以进行测量但未进行测量的情况下,指示终端开始测量,或者在终端可以不进行测量的情况下使终端停止测量,减少终端不必要的测量行为,节省终端功耗。Based on the above possible implementation methods, when the measurement information includes measurement cycle information, the measurement cycle information can be adjusted for the terminal, thereby flexibly adjusting the frequency of the terminal's measurement; when the measurement information includes parameter information of the measurement event, the parameters of the measurement event can be adjusted for the terminal, enabling the terminal to adjust the parameters of the measurement event in a timely manner, thereby enabling better measurement; when the measurement information includes first indication information, it can indicate whether the terminal should stop measuring, thereby instructing the terminal to start measuring when the terminal can perform measurement but does not, or causing the terminal to stop measuring when the terminal can stop measuring, reducing unnecessary measurement behavior of the terminal and saving terminal power consumption.

在一种可能的实现方式中,获取网络侧感知的终端状态信息,包括:接收来自核心网网元的终端状态信息。其中,核心网网元可以是核心网的具有感知功能的网元。In one possible implementation, obtaining terminal status information perceived by the network side includes: receiving terminal status information from core network elements. These core network elements can be network elements with sensing capabilities within the core network.

基于上述可能的实现方式,网络节点可以从核心网获取终端的状态信息,从而根据终端的状态信息确定用于小区切换的测量信息,从而避免由于终端的移动造成测量参数配置不合理的问题,更灵活地让终端进行切换。Based on the above possible implementation methods, network nodes can obtain the terminal's status information from the core network, and then determine the measurement information for cell handover based on the terminal's status information, thereby avoiding the problem of unreasonable measurement parameter configuration caused by the movement of the terminal, and enabling the terminal to handover more flexibly.

在一种可能的实现方式中,上述方法还包括:向终端发送第二信息,第二信息指示确定的用于小区切换的测量信息。In one possible implementation, the method further includes sending a second message to the terminal, the second message indicating determined measurement information for cell handover.

基于上述可能的实现方式,第二信息可以向终端指示用于小区切换的测量信息,以便终端及时更新测量信息,从而避免由于终端的移动造成测量参数配置不合理的问题,可以更灵活地让终端进行切换。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the second information can indicate the measurement information for cell handover to the terminal so that the terminal can update the measurement information in a timely manner, thereby avoiding the problem of unreasonable measurement parameter configuration caused by the movement of the terminal and allowing the terminal to handover more flexibly.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端的位置发生变化包括以下至少一项:终端从一个小区的中心向小区的边缘移动,终端从一个小区的边缘向小区的中心移动,终端离开服务小区的覆盖范围,终端进入第一区域,或者,终端的服务小区的覆盖范围发生变化;其中,第一区域由多个小区覆盖。终端的服务小区的覆盖范围发生变化”可以理解为终端的服务小区发生变化,例如,某些小区被移除RAN节点的管理范围,或者,RAN节点管理的小区增加。In one possible implementation, a change in the terminal's location includes at least one of the following: the terminal moves from the center of a cell to the edge of the cell; the terminal moves from the edge of a cell to the center of the cell; the terminal leaves the coverage area of the serving cell; the terminal enters a first area; or the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell changes; wherein the first area is covered by multiple cells. "A change in the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell" can be understood as a change in the terminal's serving cell, for example, some cells are removed from the management range of the RAN node, or the number of cells managed by the RAN node increases.

基于上述可能的实现方式,当终端的位置发生变化包括终端从一个小区的中心向小区的边缘移动时,表示终端接收到服务小区的信号质量逐渐变低,终端或RAN节点能够及时确定终端的测量参数,以便让终端及时切换。Based on the above possible implementation methods, when the location of the terminal changes, including when the terminal moves from the center of a cell to the edge of the cell, it indicates that the signal quality received by the terminal from the serving cell is gradually decreasing. The terminal or RAN node can determine the measurement parameters of the terminal in a timely manner so that the terminal can switch in time.

或者,当终端的位置发生变化包括终端从一个小区的边缘向小区的中心移动时,终端接入该小区,且终端接收到该小区的信号质量越来越好,终端或RAN节点可以指示终端停止测量或者确定终端的测量参数等。Alternatively, when the terminal's location changes, including when the terminal moves from the edge of a cell to the center of the cell, the terminal accesses the cell, and the signal quality received by the terminal from the cell becomes increasingly better, the terminal or the RAN node can instruct the terminal to stop measuring or determine the terminal's measurement parameters, etc.

或者,当终端的位置发生变化包括终端离开服务小区的覆盖范围时,终端或RAN节点可以使终端及时地进行切换,避免终端因离开小区覆盖范围导致信号质量过差而发送测报失败等情况。Alternatively, when the location of the terminal changes, including when the terminal leaves the coverage area of the serving cell, the terminal or the RAN node can enable the terminal to switch in a timely manner to avoid situations such as the terminal failing to send test reports due to poor signal quality caused by leaving the cell coverage area.

或者,当终端的位置发生变化包括终端进入第一区域时,终端或RAN节点可以确定测量参数,以避免发生乒乓切换等问题。Alternatively, when the location of the terminal changes, including when the terminal enters the first area, the terminal or RAN node can determine the measurement parameters to avoid problems such as ping-pong handover.

或者,当终端的位置发生变化包括终端的服务小区的覆盖范围发生变化时,RAN节点可以更新终端的测量目标,使终端正常进行测量。Alternatively, when the location of the terminal changes, including changes in the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell, the RAN node can update the terminal's measurement targets, enabling the terminal to perform measurements normally.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端的位置为终端与RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置。In one possible implementation, the terminal's location is relative to the cell managed by the RAN node.

基于上述可能的实现方式,核心网网元可以根据终端与RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置确定终端状态信息,从而确定用于小区切换的测量信息。Based on the above possible implementation methods, core network elements can determine terminal status information based on the relative position of the terminal and the cell managed by the RAN node, thereby determining the measurement information used for cell handover.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端状态信息包括终端的标识符。In one possible implementation, the terminal state information includes the terminal's identifier.

基于上述可能的实现方式,RAN节点获取终端状态信息后,可以够根据终端标识符确定需要确定用于进行切换的小区测量信息所针对的终端。Based on the above possible implementation methods, after the RAN node obtains the terminal status information, it can determine the terminal to which the cell measurement information for handover needs to be determined based on the terminal identifier.

第三方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由核心网网元执行。这里的核心网网元既可以指核心网网元本身,也可以指核心网网元中实现该方法的处理器、电路、模块、逻辑节点、芯片、或芯片系统等。该方法应用于核心网网元。例如,核心网网元可以是SF网元。Thirdly, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by core network elements. Here, "core network element" can refer to the core network element itself, or to processors, circuits, modules, logic nodes, chips, or chip systems within the core network element that implement the method. This method is applied to core network elements. For example, a core network element can be an SF network element.

该方法包括:核心网网元接收来自第一RAN节点的小区切换信息,确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量,并根据小区切换信息和终端针对第一小区的信号质量,向第一RAN节点发送第一信息,第一信息用于终端进行小区切换。其中,小区切换信息包括将终端切换至第一小区的条件信息。The method includes: a core network element receiving cell handover information from a first RAN node, determining the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell, and sending first information to the first RAN node based on the cell handover information and the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell. The first information is used by the terminal to perform cell handover. The cell handover information includes condition information for handing the terminal to the first cell.

基于上述第三方面提供的方法,核心网网元能够根据终端针对第一小区的信号质量,结合将终端切换至第一小区的条件信息,确定是否将终端切换至第一小区。因此,该方法能够灵活地对终端的移动性进行管理,也避免了目前由于终端的移动造成RAN节点配置的测量参数可能不合理的问题,可以更灵活地让终端进行切换,进而提高通信质量,满足用户需求。Based on the method provided in the third aspect above, the core network element can determine whether to hand over the terminal to the first cell based on the terminal's signal quality for the first cell and the conditions for handing over the terminal to the first cell. Therefore, this method can flexibly manage terminal mobility and avoids the current problem of potentially unreasonable measurement parameters configured in RAN nodes due to terminal movement. It allows for more flexible terminal handover, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs.

在一种可能的实现方式中,确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量,包括:确定终端的位置,根据终端的位置和第一小区的覆盖信息确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量。In one possible implementation, determining the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell includes: determining the location of the terminal, and determining the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell based on the location of the terminal and the coverage information of the first cell.

基于上述可能的实现方式,通过终端的位置和第一小区的覆盖信息可以使核心网网元更方便、更快速地确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量,从而能够确定出第一信息,用于终端进行小区切换。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the core network elements can more conveniently and quickly determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell by using the location of the terminal and the coverage information of the first cell, thereby determining the first information for the terminal to perform cell handover.

在一种可能的实现方式中,上述方法还包括:接收来自第二RAN节点的第二信息;第二信息用于指示第二RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息,第二RAN节点管理的小区包括第一小区。In one possible implementation, the method further includes: receiving second information from a second RAN node; the second information is used to indicate coverage information of a cell managed by the second RAN node, the cell managed by the second RAN node including the first cell.

基于上述可能的实现方式,核心网网元可以根据第二RAN节点所管理的小区的覆盖信息,确定出终端针对第一小区的信号质量。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the core network element can determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell based on the coverage information of the cell managed by the second RAN node.

在一种可能的实现方式中,上述方法还包括:根据第二信息构建感知地图,感知地图用于确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量。In one possible implementation, the method further includes: constructing a perception map based on the second information, the perception map being used to determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell.

基于上述可能的实现方式,核心网网元可以利用第二信息构建感知地图,以感知地图的方式确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量,再结合将终端切换至第一小区的条件信息,确定是否将终端切换至第一小区,从而可以更灵活地让终端进行切换,进而提高通信质量,满足用户需求。Based on the above possible implementation methods, core network elements can use the second information to construct a perception map, determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell in the form of the perception map, and then combine the condition information for switching the terminal to the first cell to determine whether to switch the terminal to the first cell. This allows for more flexible switching of the terminal, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息包括以下至少一项:第一指示信息,终端针对第一小区的信号质量或测量事件的信息;第一指示信息指示将终端切换至第一小区。其中,测量事件可以是A1~A5测量事件或B1~B2测量事件。In one possible implementation, the first information includes at least one of the following: first indication information, information about the signal quality or measurement events of the terminal for the first cell; the first indication information instructs the terminal to switch to the first cell. The measurement events can be A1-A5 measurement events or B1-B2 measurement events.

基于上述可能的实现方式,当第一信息包括第一指示信息时,可以用于指示终端切换至第一小区。或者,当第一信息包括终端针对第一小区的信号质量或测量事件的信息时,可以使得第一信息的接收装置(例如,第一RAN节点)获取此时终端针对第一小区的信号质量,根据该信号质量确定后续对终端行为的管理。Based on the above possible implementations, when the first information includes first indication information, it can be used to instruct the terminal to switch to the first cell. Alternatively, when the first information includes information about the terminal's signal quality or measurement events for the first cell, the receiving device of the first information (e.g., the first RAN node) can obtain the terminal's signal quality for the first cell at this time and determine subsequent management of the terminal's behavior based on the signal quality.

在一种可能的实现方式中,测量事件是根据终端的位置确定的。In one possible implementation, the measurement event is determined based on the location of the terminal.

基于上述可能的实现方式,核心网网元可以根据终端的位置更快速、更准确地确定出终端此时应该上报的测量事件。Based on the above possible implementation methods, core network elements can determine the measurement events that the terminal should report more quickly and accurately according to the terminal's location.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端的位置为终端与第一RAN节点和/或第二RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置。In one possible implementation, the terminal's location is the relative position of the terminal to the cell managed by the first RAN node and/or the second RAN node.

基于上述可能的实现方式,核心网网元可以根据终端与RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量,进而确定出是否将终端切换至第一小区,由此可以使终端更灵活地进行切换。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the core network element can determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell according to the relative position of the terminal and the cell managed by the RAN node, and then determine whether to switch the terminal to the first cell, thereby enabling the terminal to switch more flexibly.

第四方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由第一RAN节点执行。这里的第一RAN节点既可以指第一RAN节点本身,也可以指第一RAN节点中实现该方法的处理器、电路、模块、逻辑节点、芯片、或芯片系统等。该方法应用于第一RAN节点。Fourthly, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a first RAN node. Here, the first RAN node can refer to the first RAN node itself, or to a processor, circuit, module, logic node, chip, or chip system within the first RAN node that implements the method. This method is applied to the first RAN node.

该方法包括:第一RAN节点向核心网网元发送小区切换信息,接收来自核心网网元的第一信息,根据第一信息确定是否将终端切换至第一小区。其中,小区切换信息包括将终端切换至第一小区的条件信息。第一信息指示将终端切换至第一小区,第一信息是根据小区切换信息和核心网网元确定的终端针对第一小区的信号质量确定的。基于上述第四方面提供的方法,能够使得核心网网元根据终端针对第一小区的信号质量,结合将终端切换至第一小区的条件信息,确定是否将终端切换至第一小区。因此,该方法能够灵活地对终端的移动性进行管理,也避免了目前由于终端的移动造成RAN节点配置的测量参数可能不合理的问题,可以更灵活地让终端进行切换,进而提高通信质量,满足用户需求。The method includes: a first RAN node sending cell handover information to a core network element, receiving first information from the core network element, and determining whether to hand over the terminal to the first cell based on the first information. The cell handover information includes conditional information for handing the terminal to the first cell. The first information indicates that the terminal should be handed over to the first cell, and is determined based on the cell handover information and the signal quality of the terminal relative to the first cell as determined by the core network element. Based on the method provided in the fourth aspect above, the core network element can determine whether to hand over the terminal to the first cell based on the signal quality of the terminal relative to the first cell, combined with the conditional information for handing over the terminal to the first cell. Therefore, this method can flexibly manage terminal mobility and avoids the current problem of potentially unreasonable measurement parameters configured by the RAN node due to terminal movement. It allows for more flexible terminal handover, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs.

在一种可能的实现方式中,上述方法还包括:向核心网网元发送第三信息;第三信息用于指示第一RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息。In one possible implementation, the above method further includes: sending third information to the core network element; the third information is used to indicate the coverage information of the cell managed by the first RAN node.

基于上述可能的实现方式,第三信息可以使得核心网网元根据第一RAN节点所管理的小区的覆盖信息,确定出终端针对第一小区的信号质量。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the third information can enable the core network element to determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell based on the coverage information of the cell managed by the first RAN node.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息包括以下至少一项:第一指示信息,终端针对第一小区的信号质量或测量事件的信息;第一指示信息指示将终端切换至第一小区。In one possible implementation, the first information includes at least one of the following: first indication information, information about the signal quality or measurement events of the terminal for the first cell; the first indication information instructing the terminal to switch to the first cell.

基于上述可能的实现方式,当第一信息包括第一指示信息时,可以用于指示终端切换至第一小区。或者,当第一信息包括终端针对第一小区的信号质量或测量事件的信息时,可以使得第一RAN节点获取此时终端针对第一小区的信号质量,根据该信号质量确定后续对终端行为的管理。Based on the above possible implementations, when the first information includes first indication information, it can be used to instruct the terminal to switch to the first cell. Alternatively, when the first information includes information about the terminal's signal quality or measurement events for the first cell, it can enable the first RAN node to obtain the terminal's signal quality for the first cell at this time and determine subsequent management of the terminal's behavior based on the signal quality.

第五方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由第二RAN节点执行。这里的第二RAN节点既可以指第二RAN节点本身,也可以指第二RAN节点中实现该方法的处理器、电路、模块、逻辑节点、芯片、或芯片系统等。Fifthly, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a second RAN node. Here, the second RAN node can refer to the second RAN node itself, or to a processor, circuit, module, logic node, chip, or chip system within the second RAN node that implements the method.

该方法包括:第二RAN节点向第一RAN节点发送第一信息。其中,第一信息指示以下至少一项:第一小区的第一波束或终端针对第一RAN节点的定时提前量。其中,第一RAN节点管理的小区包括第一小区,第一小区为终端切换的目标小区,第一波束用于终端切换至第一小区后与第一小区通信,定时提前量用于终端切换至第一小区后进行上行同步。第一信息是根据第二信息确定的,第二信息包括以下至少一项:终端对第一小区的测量结果、终端的位置信息或终端的运动速度。The method includes: a second RAN node sending first information to a first RAN node. The first information indicates at least one of the following: a first beam of a first cell or a timing advance of the terminal relative to the first RAN node. The cells managed by the first RAN node include the first cell, which is the target cell for terminal handover. The first beam is used for communication with the first cell after handover, and the timing advance is used for uplink synchronization after handover. The first information is determined based on second information, which includes at least one of the following: the terminal's measurement results of the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's speed.

基于上述第五方面提供的方法,第二RAN节点能够根据终端对第一小区的测量结果、终端的位置信息或终端的运动速度中的至少一项确定第一波束,和/或,终端切换到第一RAN节点管理的第一小区会用到的定时提前量信息。如此,可以使得第一RAN节点可以通过第一波束与终端通信,不进行波束对齐就能确定合适的波束,所以可以降低切换时延。此外,也可以使得终端在获取该定时提前量后,能够快速实现与第一RAN节点的上行同步,进而快速地切换到第一小区,从而大大降低终端切换的时延。因此,通过上述方法能够有效降低切换时延,能够降低更灵活地让终端进行切换,进而提高通信质量,满足用户需求。Based on the method provided in the fifth aspect above, the second RAN node can determine the first beam based on at least one of the terminal's measurement results of the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's movement speed, and/or the timing advance information used by the terminal when switching to the first cell managed by the first RAN node. This allows the first RAN node to communicate with the terminal through the first beam, determining a suitable beam without beam alignment, thus reducing handover latency. Furthermore, after acquiring the timing advance, the terminal can quickly achieve uplink synchronization with the first RAN node, thereby quickly switching to the first cell and significantly reducing handover latency. Therefore, the above method effectively reduces handover latency, allows for more flexible handover, improves communication quality, and meets user needs.

在一种可能的实现方式中,上述方法还包括:获取感知信息,感知信息包括终端的位置信息,或者感知信息包括终端的位置信息和终端的运动速度。In one possible implementation, the method further includes: acquiring sensing information, which includes the terminal's location information, or the sensing information includes the terminal's location information and the terminal's movement speed.

基于上述可能的实现方式,可以通过获取终端的位置信息,或者感知信息包括终端的位置信息和终端的运动速度的方式,确定出第一波束,和/或,终端切换到第一RAN节点管理的第一小区会用到的定时提前量信息,可以使得第一RAN节点可以通过第一波束与终端通信,不进行波束对齐就能确定合适的波束,以使终端降低切换时延。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the first beam can be determined by obtaining the terminal's location information, or by sensing information including the terminal's location information and the terminal's movement speed, and/or by obtaining the timing advance information that the terminal will use when switching to the first cell managed by the first RAN node. This allows the first RAN node to communicate with the terminal through the first beam and determine the appropriate beam without beam alignment, thereby reducing the handover latency of the terminal.

在一种可能的实现方式中,上述定时提前量的数量为多个,多个定时提前量中任意一个定时提前量与第一小区的一个参考点对应,上述方法还包括:接收来自第一RAN节点的第三信息,第三信息指示第一定时提前量;多个定时提前量包括第一定时提前量。其中,参考点可以是指时间点或位置。In one possible implementation, there are multiple timing advances, each corresponding to a reference point in the first cell. The method further includes receiving third information from the first RAN node, the third information indicating a first timing advance; the multiple timing advances include the first timing advance. The reference point can refer to a point in time or a location.

基于上述可能的实现方式,对于移动的终端,由于终端在不同时刻可能处于不同的位置,因此可以通过多个定时提前量对应不同的参考点,来指示不同参考点的终端会用到的定时提前量。Based on the above possible implementation methods, for mobile terminals, since the terminals may be in different locations at different times, multiple timing advances can be used to correspond to different reference points to indicate the timing advances that the terminals at different reference points will use.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第一波束的数量为多个,多个第一波束中任意一个第一波束与第一小区中的一个参考点对应。其中,参考点可以是指时间点或位置。In one possible implementation, there are multiple first beams, and any one of the multiple first beams corresponds to a reference point in the first cell. The reference point can refer to a point in time or a location.

基于上述可能的实现方式,对于移动的终端,由于终端在不同时刻可能处于不同的位置,对于第一RAN节点来说,接收不同位置的终端发送的信号要利用不同的波束。因此可以通过多个定时提前量对应不同的参考点,来指示不同参考点的终端会用到的第一波束。Based on the above possible implementations, for mobile terminals, since the terminals may be in different locations at different times, the first RAN node needs to utilize different beams to receive signals transmitted by terminals in different locations. Therefore, multiple timing advances corresponding to different reference points can be used to indicate the first beam that terminals at different reference points will use.

在一种可能的实现方式中,上述方法还包括:根据第一RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息构建感知地图;感知地图用于确定终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项;根据感知地图确定第一波束或定时提前量中的一项或多项。In one possible implementation, the method further includes: constructing a perception map based on the coverage information of the cell managed by the first RAN node; using the perception map to determine at least one of the terminal's location or the terminal's movement speed; and determining one or more of the first beam or timing advance based on the perception map.

基于上述可能的实现方式,第二RAN节点可以获取第一RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息构建感知地图,根据感知地图确定第一波束和/或定时提前量,进而使得第一RAN节点可以第一波束与终端通信,不进行波束对齐就能确定合适的波束,降低切换时延。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the second RAN node can obtain the coverage information of the cells managed by the first RAN node to construct a perception map, determine the first beam and/or timing advance based on the perception map, thereby enabling the first RAN node to communicate with the terminal using the first beam, determine the appropriate beam without beam alignment, and reduce handover latency.

在一种可能的实现方式中,上述方法还包括:接收来自核心网网元的第四信息,第四信息指示以下至少一项:第一波束或定时提前量。In one possible implementation, the method further includes receiving fourth information from a core network element, the fourth information indicating at least one of the following: a first beam or timing advance.

基于上述可能的实现方式,第二RAN节点可以通过第四信息从核心网网元获取第一波束或定时提前量。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the second RAN node can obtain the first beam or timing advance from the core network element through the fourth information.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端的位置为终端与第一RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置。In one possible implementation, the terminal's location is the relative position of the terminal to the cell managed by the first RAN node.

基于上述可能的实现方式,第二RAN节点可以根据终端与RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置确定第一信息,从而确定第一小区的第一波束或终端针对第一RAN节点的定时提前量。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the second RAN node can determine the first information according to the relative position of the terminal and the cell managed by the RAN node, thereby determining the first beam of the first cell or the timing advance of the terminal for the first RAN node.

在一种可能的实现方式中,上述方法还包括:接收来自终端的测量结果。其中,该测量结果可以作为感知信息。In one possible implementation, the method further includes receiving a measurement result from the terminal. This measurement result can be used as sensing information.

基于上述可能的实现方式,第二RAN节点可以根据终端的测量结果获取终端的位置信息,或者感知信息包括终端的位置信息和终端的运动速度。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the second RAN node can obtain the terminal's location information based on the terminal's measurement results, or the sensing information includes the terminal's location information and the terminal's movement speed.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息承载于切换请求消息中。In one possible implementation, the first information is carried in the handover request message.

基于上述可能的实现方式,第二RAN节点可以通过切换请求消息向第一RAN节点指示第一小区的第一波束或终端针对第一RAN节点的定时提前量。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the second RAN node can indicate the first beam of the first cell or the timing advance of the terminal to the first RAN node through a handover request message.

第六方面,提供了一种通信方法,该方法可以由第一RAN节点执行。这里的第一RAN节点既可以指第一RAN节点本身,也可以指第一RAN节点中实现该方法的处理器、电路、模块、逻辑节点、芯片、或芯片系统等。Sixthly, a communication method is provided, which can be executed by a first RAN node. Here, the first RAN node can refer to the first RAN node itself, or to a processor, circuit, module, logic node, chip, or chip system within the first RAN node that implements the method.

该方法包括:接收第一信息,在终端切换至第一小区后,根据第一信息与终端通信。其中,第一信息指示以下至少一项:第一小区的第一波束或终端针对第一RAN节点的定时提前量;其中,第一RAN节点管理的小区包括第一小区,第一小区为终端切换的目标小区,第一波束用于终端切换至第一小区后与终端通信,定时提前量用于终端切换至第一小区后进行上行同步,第一信息是根据第二信息确定的,第二信息包括以下至少一项:终端对第一小区的测量结果、终端的位置信息或终端的运动速度。The method includes: receiving first information, and communicating with the terminal according to the first information after the terminal switches to a first cell. The first information indicates at least one of the following: a first beam of the first cell or a timing advance of the terminal for a first RAN node; wherein the cells managed by the first RAN node include the first cell, the first cell is the target cell for the terminal switching, the first beam is used for communication with the terminal after switching to the first cell, the timing advance is used for uplink synchronization after switching to the first cell, and the first information is determined based on second information, which includes at least one of the following: the terminal's measurement results of the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's movement speed.

基于上述第六方面提供的方法,第一RAN节点可以根据第一信息指示的第一波束与终端通信,从而不进行波束对齐就能确定合适的波束,所以可以降低切换时延。此外,也可以将第一信息指示的定时提前量指示给终端,使得终端在获取该定时提前量后,能够快速实现与第一RAN节点的上行同步,进而快速地切换到第一小区,从而大大降低终端切换的时延。因此,通过上述方法能够有效降低切换时延,能够降低更灵活地让终端进行切换,进而提高通信质量,满足用户需求。Based on the method provided in the sixth aspect above, the first RAN node can communicate with the terminal according to the first beam indicated by the first information, thereby determining a suitable beam without beam alignment, thus reducing handover latency. Furthermore, the timing advance indicated by the first information can also be given to the terminal, enabling the terminal to quickly achieve uplink synchronization with the first RAN node after acquiring the timing advance, and thus quickly hand over to the first cell, significantly reducing terminal handover latency. Therefore, the above methods can effectively reduce handover latency, allow for more flexible handover by the terminal, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息指示第一波束,根据第一信息与终端通信,包括:通过第一波束与终端通信。In one possible implementation, the first information indicates the first beam, and communicating with the terminal based on the first information includes: communicating with the terminal via the first beam.

基于上述可能的实现方式,第一RAN节点可以通过第一信息指示的第一波束与终端通信,不进行波束对齐就能确定合适的波束,因此能够降低切换时延。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the first RAN node can communicate with the terminal through the first beam indicated by the first information, and can determine the appropriate beam without beam alignment, thus reducing handover latency.

在一种可能的实现方式中,接收第一信息,包括:接收来自第二RAN节点或核心网网元的第一信息。In one possible implementation, receiving the first information includes: receiving the first information from the second RAN node or a core network element.

基于上述可能的实现方式,第一RAN节点可以通过第二RAN节点或核心网网元获取第一信息,以获取第一小区的第一波束或终端针对第一RAN节点的定时提前量中的至少一项。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the first RAN node can obtain the first information through the second RAN node or core network element to obtain at least one of the first beam of the first cell or the timing advance of the terminal for the first RAN node.

在一种可能的实现方式中,上述定时提前量的数量为多个,多个定时提前量中任意一个定时提前量与第一小区的一个参考点对应,上述方法还包括:发送第三信息,第三信息指示第一定时提前量;多个定时提前量包括第一定时提前量。其中,参考点可以是指时间点或位置。In one possible implementation, there are multiple timing advances, each corresponding to a reference point in the first cell. The method further includes sending third information indicating a first timing advance; the multiple timing advances include the first timing advance. The reference point can refer to a point in time or a location.

基于上述可能的实现方式,第一定时提前量可以使得终端与第一RAN节点进行上行同步,可以不进行额外的获取定时提前量,从而能够降低切换时延。对于移动的终端,由于终端在不同时刻可能处于不同的位置,因此可以通过多个定时提前量对应不同的参考点,来指示不同参考点的终端会用到的定时提前量。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the first timing advance enables the terminal to perform uplink synchronization with the first RAN node without needing to acquire the timing advance additionally, thereby reducing handover latency. For mobile terminals, since the terminal may be in different locations at different times, multiple timing advances can be used to correspond to different reference points, indicating the timing advance that the terminal at different reference points will use.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第一波束的数量为多个,多个第一波束中任意一个第一波束与第一小区中的一个参考点对应。其中,参考点可以是指时间点或位置。In one possible implementation, there are multiple first beams, and any one of the multiple first beams corresponds to a reference point in the first cell. The reference point can refer to a point in time or a location.

基于上述可能的实现方式,对于移动的终端,由于终端在不同时刻可能处于不同的位置,对于第一RAN节点来说,接收不同位置的终端发送的信号要利用不同的波束。因此可以通过多个定时提前量对应不同的参考点,来指示不同参考点的终端会用到的第一波束。Based on the above possible implementations, for mobile terminals, since the terminals may be in different locations at different times, the first RAN node needs to utilize different beams to receive signals transmitted by terminals in different locations. Therefore, multiple timing advances corresponding to different reference points can be used to indicate the first beam that terminals at different reference points will use.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端的位置为终端与第一RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置。In one possible implementation, the terminal's location is the relative position of the terminal to the cell managed by the first RAN node.

基于上述可能的实现方式,可以根据终端与第一RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置确定第一信息。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the first information can be determined according to the relative position of the terminal and the cell managed by the first RAN node.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息承载于切换请求消息中。In one possible implementation, the first information is carried in the handover request message.

基于上述可能的实现方式,第一RAN节点可以从切换请求消息中获取第一信息,进而获取第一小区的第一波束或终端针对第一RAN节点的定时提前量。Based on the above possible implementation methods, the first RAN node can obtain the first information from the handover request message, and then obtain the first beam of the first cell or the timing advance of the terminal for the first RAN node.

第七方面,提供了一种通信装置用于实现上述方法。该通信装置可以为上述第一方面中的核心网网元;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第二方面中的网络节点;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第三方面中的核心网网元;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第四方面中的第一RAN节点;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第五方面中的第二RAN节点;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第六方面中的第一RAN节点。该通信装置包括实现上述方法相应的模块、单元、或手段(means),该模块、单元、或means可以通过硬件实现,软件实现,或者通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。该硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块或单元。In a seventh aspect, a communication device is provided for implementing the above-described method. This communication device can be a core network element in the first aspect; or, it can be a network node in the second aspect; or, it can be a core network element in the third aspect; or, it can be a first RAN node in the fourth aspect; or, it can be a second RAN node in the fifth aspect; or, it can be a first RAN node in the sixth aspect. The communication device includes modules, units, or means corresponding to the above-described method. These modules, units, or means can be implemented in hardware, software, or by hardware executing corresponding software. The hardware or software includes one or more modules or units corresponding to the above-described functions.

在一种可能的实现方式中,该通信装置可以包括处理模块和接口模块。该处理模块,可以用于实现上述任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的处理功能。该处理模块例如可以为处理器。该接口模块,也可以称为接口单元,用以实现上述任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的发送和/或接收功能。该接口模块可以由接口电路,收发机,收发器或者通信接口构成。In one possible implementation, the communication device may include a processing module and an interface module. The processing module can be used to implement the processing functions in any of the above aspects and their possible implementations. The processing module may be, for example, a processor. The interface module, also called an interface unit, is used to implement the sending and/or receiving functions in any of the above aspects and their possible implementations. The interface module may consist of an interface circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver unit, or a communication interface.

在一种可能的实现方式中,接口模块包括发送模块和接收模块,分别用于实现上述任一方面及其任意可能的实现方式中的发送和接收功能。In one possible implementation, the interface module includes a sending module and a receiving module, which are used to implement the sending and receiving functions in any of the above aspects and any possible implementations.

第八方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:处理器;用于通过执行存储器中存储的计算机程序(或计算机可执行指令),和/或通过逻辑电路,使得该通信装置执行如上述任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为上述第一方面中的核心网网元;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第二方面中的网络节点;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第三方面中的核心网网元;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第四方面中的第一RAN节点;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第五方面中的第二RAN节点;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第六方面中的第一RAN节点。可选的,上述处理器的数量可以是一个或多个。Eighthly, a communication device is provided, comprising: a processor; configured to cause the communication device to perform the method described in any of the preceding aspects by executing a computer program (or computer-executable instructions) stored in a memory, and/or by means of logic circuitry. The communication device may be a core network element in the first aspect; or, the communication device may be a network node in the second aspect; or, the communication device may be a core network element in the third aspect; or, the communication device may be a first RAN node in the fourth aspect; or, the communication device may be a second RAN node in the fifth aspect; or, the communication device may be a first RAN node in the sixth aspect. Optionally, the number of processors may be one or more.

在一种可能的实现方式中,该通信装置还包括存储器。In one possible implementation, the communication device also includes a memory.

在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器和存储器集成在一起;或者,该存储器独立于该处理器。In one possible implementation, the processor and memory are integrated together; or, the memory is independent of the processor.

在一种可能的实现方式中,该通信装置还包括通信接口,该通信接口用于该通信装置与其他设备进行通信,例如数据和/或信号的发送或接收。示例性的,通信接口可以是收发器、电路、总线、模块或其它类型的通信接口。In one possible implementation, the communication device further includes a communication interface for communicating with other devices, such as transmitting or receiving data and/or signals. Exemplarily, the communication interface may be a transceiver, circuit, bus, module, or other type of communication interface.

在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器和/或存储器还包括人工智能(artificial intelligence,AI)模块,用于实现AI相关功能。AI模块可以通过软件、硬件或软硬件结合的方式实现AI功能。例如,AI模块包括无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)智能控制器(RAN intelligent controller,RIC)模块。例如AI模块可以是近实时RIC或者非实时RIC。In one possible implementation, the processor and/or memory also include an artificial intelligence (AI) module for implementing AI-related functions. The AI module can implement AI functions through software, hardware, or a combination of both. For example, the AI module includes a radio access network (RAN) intelligent controller (RIC) module. The AI module can be a near real-time RIC or a non-real-time RIC.

在一种可能的实现方式中,该通信装置为芯片或芯片系统。可选的,该通信装置是芯片系统时,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In one possible implementation, the communication device is a chip or a chip system. Optionally, when the communication device is a chip system, it can be composed of chips or may include chips and other discrete components.

第九方面,提供了一种通信装置,包括:处理器和接口电路;接口电路,用于接收计算机程序或指令并传输至处理器;处理器用于执行所述计算机程序或指令,以使该通信装置执行如上述任一方面所述的方法。该通信装置可以为上述第一方面中的核心网网元;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第二方面中的网络节点;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第三方面中的核心网网元;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第四方面中的第一RAN节点;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第五方面中的第二RAN节点;或者,该通信装置可以为上述第六方面中的第一RAN节点。可选的,上述处理器的数量可以是一个或多个。A ninth aspect provides a communication device, comprising: a processor and an interface circuit; the interface circuit being configured to receive a computer program or instructions and transmit them to the processor; the processor being configured to execute the computer program or instructions to cause the communication device to perform the method described in any of the preceding aspects. The communication device may be a core network element as described in the first aspect; or, the communication device may be a network node as described in the second aspect; or, the communication device may be a core network element as described in the third aspect; or, the communication device may be a first RAN node as described in the fourth aspect; or, the communication device may be a second RAN node as described in the fifth aspect; or, the communication device may be a first RAN node as described in the sixth aspect. Optionally, the number of processors may be one or more.

在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器还包括AI模块,用于实现AI相关功能。AI模块可以通过软件、硬件或软硬件结合的方式实现AI功能。例如,AI模块包括RIC模块。例如AI模块可以是近实时RIC或者非实时RIC。In one possible implementation, the processor also includes an AI module for implementing AI-related functions. The AI module can implement AI functions through software, hardware, or a combination of both. For example, the AI module may include a RIC module. The AI module could be a near real-time RIC or a non-real-time RIC.

在一种可能的实现方式中,该通信装置为芯片或芯片系统。可选的,该通信装置是芯片系统时,可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。In one possible implementation, the communication device is a chip or a chip system. Optionally, when the communication device is a chip system, it can be composed of chips or may include chips and other discrete components.

第十方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,该计算机可读存储介质中存储有指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机可以执行上述任一方面所述的方法。In a tenth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, which stores instructions that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the methods described in any of the preceding aspects.

第十一方面,提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机可以执行上述任一方面所述的方法。In an eleventh aspect, a computer program product containing instructions is provided, which, when run on a computer, enables the computer to perform the methods described in any of the preceding aspects.

第十二方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括用于执行上述第一方面所述方法的核心网网元,和用于执行上述第二方面所述方法的网络节点。In a twelfth aspect, a communication system is provided, including a core network element for performing the method described in the first aspect above, and a network node for performing the method described in the second aspect above.

第十三方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括用于执行上述第三方面所述方法的核心网网元,和用于执行上述第四方面所述方法的第一RAN节点。In a thirteenth aspect, a communication system is provided, including a core network element for performing the method described in the third aspect above, and a first RAN node for performing the method described in the fourth aspect above.

第十四方面,提供了一种通信系统,包括用于执行上述第五方面所述方法的第二RAN节点,和用于执行上述第六方面所述方法的第一RAN节点。In a fourteenth aspect, a communication system is provided, including a second RAN node for performing the method described in the fifth aspect above, and a first RAN node for performing the method described in the sixth aspect above.

其中,第七方面至第十四方面中任一种可能的实现方式所带来的技术效果可参见上述第一方面至第六方面中任一方面或任一方面中不同可能的实现方式所带来的技术效果,此处不再赘述。The technical effects of any possible implementation of aspects seven through fourteen can be found in the technical effects of any one of aspects one through six above, or different possible implementations of any one of aspects, and will not be repeated here.

可以理解的是,在方案不矛盾的前提下,上述各个方面中的方案均可以结合。Understandably, provided that the solutions do not contradict each other, the solutions in the above aspects can be combined.

附图说明Attached Figure Description

图1为本申请提供的终端进行站间切换的流程示意图;Figure 1 is a schematic diagram of the process of inter-station handover of the terminal provided in this application;

图2为本申请提供的通信系统架构示意图;Figure 2 is a schematic diagram of the communication system architecture provided in this application;

图3为本申请提供的通信装置的硬件结构示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of the communication device provided in this application;

图4为本申请提供的通信方法的流程示意图一;Figure 4 is a flowchart illustrating the communication method provided in this application.

图5为本申请提供的通信方法的流程示意图二;Figure 5 is a flowchart of the communication method provided in this application (II).

图6为本申请提供的通信方法的流程示意图三;Figure 6 is a flowchart illustrating the communication method provided in this application.

图7为本申请提供的通信装置的结构示意图。Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of the communication device provided in this application.

具体实施方式Detailed Implementation

在介绍本申请的技术方案之前,对本申请涉及的相关技术术语进行解释说明。可以理解的是,这些解释说明是为了让本申请更容易被理解,而不应该视为对本申请所要求的保护范围的限定。Before introducing the technical solution of this application, the relevant technical terms involved in this application are explained. It is understood that these explanations are intended to make this application easier to understand and should not be regarded as a limitation on the scope of protection claimed in this application.

1、测量上报类型1. Measurement Reporting Types

RAN节点可以配置终端进行测量,以获取终端的测量信息,并且RAN节点还可以配置终端的测量上报类型,以获取期望类型的终端测量结果。其中,测量上报类型可以包括测量事件类型、周期上报类型、小区全球标识(cell global identifier,CGI)类型,或系统帧号和帧定时差(system frame number and frame timing difference,SFTD)类型。在终端进行小区切换前,RAN节点通常会配置测量事件类型的测量以获取终端针对服务小区或邻区的信号质量。RAN nodes can configure terminals to perform measurements to obtain measurement information from the terminals. Furthermore, RAN nodes can configure the measurement reporting type of the terminals to obtain the desired type of terminal measurement results. The measurement reporting type can include measurement event type, periodic reporting type, cell global identifier (CGI) type, or system frame number and frame timing difference (SFTD) type. Before a terminal performs a cell handover, the RAN node typically configures measurement event types to obtain the signal quality of the terminal relative to the serving cell or neighboring cells.

示例性的,以RAN节点配置测量事件类型的测量为例进行说明。RAN节点可以配置至少一个测量目标(用不同的测量目标ID区分),一个测量目标对应至少一个测量配置(用不同的测量配置ID区分),由测量标识符(measID)将测量目标ID和测量配置ID关联起来。具体的,RAN节点使用重配置消息指示终端进行测量,重配置消息可以包括测量目标和测量配置,并且测量配置为测量事件对应的配置。其中,对测量事件的配置的介绍可以见下文。例如,当RAN节点为终端配置测量上报类型为测量事件类型时,测量配置可以是对测量目标进行测量的具体参数,例如测量门限等参数。应理解其他类型的测量上报类型也类似,不再赘述。由此终端可以对配置的测量目标按照测量配置进行测量,对于满足测量配置条件的测量目标,上报测量报告,测量报告包括对应的测量标识符。For example, let's take the measurement event type configured by the RAN node as an example. The RAN node can configure at least one measurement target (distinguished by different measurement target IDs), and each measurement target corresponds to at least one measurement configuration (distinguished by different measurement configuration IDs). A measurement identifier (measID) associates the measurement target ID and the measurement configuration ID. Specifically, the RAN node uses a reconfiguration message to instruct the terminal to perform measurements. The reconfiguration message can include the measurement target and the measurement configuration, and the measurement configuration is the configuration corresponding to the measurement event. A description of the measurement event configuration is provided below. For example, when the RAN node configures the measurement reporting type for the terminal as a measurement event type, the measurement configuration can be specific parameters for measuring the measurement target, such as measurement thresholds. It should be understood that other types of measurement reporting types are similar and will not be elaborated further. Thus, the terminal can perform measurements on the configured measurement targets according to the measurement configuration. For measurement targets that meet the measurement configuration conditions, a measurement report is reported, including the corresponding measurement identifier.

其中,RAN节点可以用信元measObjectNR配置测量目标,配置的内容包括待测量的同步信号和PBCH块(synchronization signal and PBCH block,SSB)或信道状态信息参考信号(channel state information reference signal,CSI-RS)的频点。可选的,配置的内容还可以包括下面至少一项:邻区测量列表,参考信号的配置(例如,时频资源的配置),测量间隙(measurement gap),测量周期。当配置的内容包括SSB的频点时,配置的内容还可以包括SSB的频段号或子载波间隔(sub-carrier space,SCS)等参数。当配置的内容包括CSI-RS的频点时,配置的内容还可以包括CSI-RS的频段号或SCS等参数。The RAN node can configure the measurement target using the `measObjectNR` cell. The configuration includes the frequency points of the synchronization signal and PBCH block (SSB) or channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) to be measured. Optionally, the configuration may also include at least one of the following: a neighboring cell measurement list, reference signal configuration (e.g., time-frequency resource configuration), measurement gap, and measurement period. When the configuration includes the SSB frequency point, it may also include parameters such as the SSB band number or sub-carrier space (SCS). When the configuration includes the CSI-RS frequency point, it may also include parameters such as the CSI-RS band number or SCS.

2、测量事件2. Measurement Events

上文中提到,一个测量目标对应至少一个测量配置,其中,以RAN节点为终端配置测量上报类型为测量事件类型为例,一个测量配置所配置的内容包括:测量事件标识符(event ID,例如,包括A1~A6和B1~B2等)。可选的,一个测量配置所配置的内容还包括下面参数的至少一项:与测量事件对应的测量门限(threshold)、测量偏置(offset)、迟滞(hysteresis)或者触发时间(timeToTrigger)等。As mentioned above, each measurement target corresponds to at least one measurement configuration. Taking the RAN node as the terminal and configuring the measurement reporting type as the measurement event type as an example, the content configured in a measurement configuration includes: a measurement event identifier (event ID, for example, including A1~A6 and B1~B2, etc.). Optionally, the content configured in a measurement configuration also includes at least one of the following parameters: the measurement threshold, measurement offset, hysteresis, or trigger time (timeToTrigger) corresponding to the measurement event.

如表1所示,目前包括以下8种测量事件类型。As shown in Table 1, the following 8 types of measurement events are currently included.

表1
Table 1

表1中,Ms表示终端对服务小区的测量结果,Mn表示终端对邻区的测量结果,Hys表示测量结果的幅度迟滞(幅度迟滞可以理解为前一时刻的测量结果对下一时刻的测量结果的影响,即拖尾)。其中,Ms或Mn可以是参考信号接收功率(reference signal receiving power,RSRP)或参考信号接收质量(reference signal receiving quality,RSRQ)等。timeToTrigger表示持续满足事件进入条件的时长,即时间迟滞(时间迟滞可以理解为持续时间),应理解即使测量值在波动,当该波动大于Hys且持续timeToTrigger,会触发终端报出测量报告。A1、A2、A4事件对应的Thresh可以表示门限,A5事件对应的Thresh1和Thresh2可以分别表示门限1和门限2。A3事件对应的Ofs表示服务小区的频率偏置,Ofn表示邻区的频率偏置。A3事件或A6事件对应的Ocs表示服务小区的小区个体偏移(cell individual offset,CIO),Ocn表示邻区的小区偏移量CIO,Off表示测量结果的偏置。在下文中,将测量事件对应的门限称为“测量门限”。In Table 1, Ms represents the terminal's measurement result of the serving cell, Mn represents the terminal's measurement result of the neighboring cell, and Hys represents the amplitude hysteresis of the measurement result (amplitude hysteresis can be understood as the influence of the measurement result of the previous moment on the measurement result of the next moment, i.e., trailing). Ms or Mn can be the reference signal receiving power (RSRP) or reference signal receiving quality (RSRQ), etc. timeToTrigger represents the duration for which the event entry condition is continuously met, i.e., time hysteresis (time hysteresis can be understood as the duration). It should be understood that even if the measurement value fluctuates, if the fluctuation is greater than Hys and continues for timeToTrigger, the terminal will be triggered to report a measurement. Thresh corresponding to events A1, A2, and A4 can represent thresholds, and Thresh1 and Thresh2 corresponding to event A5 can represent threshold 1 and threshold 2, respectively. Ofs corresponding to event A3 represents the frequency offset of the serving cell, and Ofn represents the frequency offset of the neighboring cell. For events A3 or A6, Ocs represents the cell individual offset (CIO) of the serving cell, Ocn represents the cell offset (CIO) of the neighboring cell, and Off represents the offset of the measurement result. In the following text, the threshold corresponding to the measurement event will be referred to as the "measurement threshold".

示例性的,以RAN节点为终端配置A2测量事件为例,当Ms满足表1中的进入条件Ms+Hys<Thresh(即终端对服务小区的测量结果与幅度迟滞之和小于A2事件对应的门限)并持续timeToTrigger时长时,终端就可以向RAN节点发送测量报告,可以包括该A2事件对应的测量目标ID和测量配置ID,以便向RAN节点指示终端对该测量目标已满足测量配置ID对应的测量事件。For example, taking the RAN node configuring the A2 measurement event for the terminal as an example, when Ms meets the entry condition Ms+Hys<Thresh in Table 1 (that is, the sum of the terminal's measurement result of the serving cell and the amplitude hysteresis is less than the threshold corresponding to the A2 event) and continues for the timeToTrigger duration, the terminal can send a measurement report to the RAN node, which may include the measurement target ID and measurement configuration ID corresponding to the A2 event, so as to indicate to the RAN node that the terminal has met the measurement event corresponding to the measurement configuration ID for the measurement target.

3、小区切换3. Cell handover

目前,当终端处于无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC)连接态时,随着终端的移动以及无线通信环境的变化,可能出现服务小区信号逐渐变差、相邻小区的信号逐渐变好的情况。此时,为了保证通信质量,RAN节点会为终端配置测量参数,以便终端根据测量参数进行测量,并上报测量报告。RAN节点根据终端上报的测量报告,可以让终端切换到信号较好的邻区。Currently, when a terminal is in Radio Resource Control (RRC) connected state, as the terminal moves and the wireless communication environment changes, the serving cell signal may gradually deteriorate while the signal of neighboring cells gradually improves. In this situation, to ensure communication quality, the RAN node configures measurement parameters for the terminal, enabling the terminal to perform measurements based on these parameters and report the measurements. Based on the measurement reports reported by the terminal, the RAN node can then allow the terminal to switch to a neighboring cell with a better signal.

下面以站间切换场景为例介绍小区切换的具体过程。具体的,可以如图1所示。在图1中,RAN节点1为终端进行小区切换的源节点,RAN节点2为终端进行小区切换的目标节点,其中,源节点可以理解为终端进行小区切换的源小区所属的RAN节点,目标节点可以理解为终端进行小区切换的目标小区所属的RAN节点。图1所示的方法可以包括如下步骤:The following uses an inter-site handover scenario as an example to illustrate the specific process of cell handover. Specifically, it can be shown in Figure 1. In Figure 1, RAN node 1 is the source node for the terminal's cell handover, and RAN node 2 is the target node for the terminal's cell handover. The source node can be understood as the RAN node to which the source cell of the terminal's cell handover belongs, and the target node can be understood as the RAN node to which the target cell of the terminal's cell handover belongs. The method shown in Figure 1 may include the following steps:

S101:RAN节点1向终端发送重配置(测量配置)消息。相应的,终端接收来自RAN节点1的重配置(测量配置)消息。S101: RAN node 1 sends a reconfiguration (measurement configuration) message to the terminal. Correspondingly, the terminal receives the reconfiguration (measurement configuration) message from RAN node 1.

该重配置消息可以包括测量目标和测量配置的信息,具体参见前述内容。This reconfiguration message may include information about the measurement target and measurement configuration, as detailed above.

S102:终端向RAN节点1发送测量报告。相应的,RAN节点1接收来自终端的测量报告。S102: The terminal sends a measurement report to RAN node 1. Correspondingly, RAN node 1 receives the measurement report from the terminal.

示例性的,终端接收到重配置消息后,可以根据重配置消息配置的测量配置进行测量。例如,以重配置消息包括测量目标1、测量上报类型为测量事件类型、以及测量事件为A3和测量事件A3对应的测量配置为例,其中,测量事件A3对应的测量配置包括A3的门限、邻区信号质量比服务小区信号质量高的偏置的值、timeToTrigger等参数(参考对表1参数的说明,A3的门限对应表1中A3对应的Thresh,偏置对应表1中A3对应的参数Off,timeToTrigger对应表1中A3对应的参数timeToTrigger),并且测量目标1与频点1300、SCS=15kHz对应,终端可以对满足频点1300、SCS=15kHz的至少一个邻区进行测量。若终端测量到源小区的RSRP低于邻区1的RSRP一定偏置,且保持timeToTrigger时长,根据表1可知,此时已满足A3对应的进入条件,终端可以上报A3测量报告,则邻区1可能作为终端进行切换的目标小区。For example, after receiving a reconfiguration message, the terminal can perform measurements according to the measurement configuration configured in the reconfiguration message. For instance, taking a reconfiguration message that includes measurement target 1, measurement reporting type as measurement event type, measurement event A3, and the measurement configuration corresponding to measurement event A3, the measurement configuration corresponding to measurement event A3 includes parameters such as the threshold for A3, the offset value where the neighboring cell signal quality is higher than the serving cell signal quality, and timeToTrigger (refer to the explanation of the parameters in Table 1; the threshold for A3 corresponds to Thresh in Table 1, the offset corresponds to Off in Table 1, and timeToTrigger corresponds to timeToTrigger in Table 1). Furthermore, measurement target 1 corresponds to frequency 1300 and SCS = 15kHz, and the terminal can perform measurements on at least one neighboring cell that satisfies frequency 1300 and SCS = 15kHz. If the terminal measures that the RSRP of the source cell is lower than the RSRP of neighboring cell 1 by a certain offset and maintains the timeToTrigger duration, according to Table 1, the entry condition corresponding to A3 has been met. The terminal can report the A3 measurement report, and neighboring cell 1 may be used as the target cell for handover.

S103:RAN节点1向RAN节点2发送切换请求。相应的,RAN节点2接收来自RAN节点1的切换请求。S103: RAN Node 1 sends a handover request to RAN Node 2. Correspondingly, RAN Node 2 receives the handover request from RAN Node 1.

示例性的,RAN节点1基于测量报告和网络侧的资源,为终端确定出目标小区所属的目标节点(例如,RAN节点2)。For example, RAN node 1 determines the target node (e.g., RAN node 2) to which the target cell belongs for the terminal based on measurement reports and network-side resources.

S104:RAN节点2向RAN节点1发送切换确认。相应的,RAN节点1接收来自RAN节点2的切换确认。S104: RAN Node 2 sends a handover confirmation to RAN Node 1. Correspondingly, RAN Node 1 receives the handover confirmation from RAN Node 2.

其中,该切换确认包括上述终端切换至RAN节点2后会用到的无线资源的信息。The handover confirmation includes information about the radio resources that the terminal will use after switching to RAN node 2.

S105:RAN节点1向终端发送重配置(切换)消息。相应的,终端接收来自RAN节点1的重配置(切换)消息。S105: RAN node 1 sends a reconfiguration (switching) message to the terminal. Correspondingly, the terminal receives the reconfiguration (switching) message from RAN node 1.

其中,该重配置消息指示终端切换至目标小区(目标小区由RAN节点2管理),该重配置消息包括终端切换至目标小区后会用到的无线资源的信息。The reconfiguration message instructs the terminal to switch to the target cell (managed by RAN node 2), and includes information on the radio resources that the terminal will use after switching to the target cell.

S106:终端向RAN节点2发起随机接入。S106: The terminal initiates random access to RAN node 2.

可以理解的,终端进行随机接入是为了与RAN节点2进行定时校准(time aligement,TA),然后完成与RAN节点2的上行同步。终端成功完成随机接入后,还可以向RAN节点2发送重配置完成(RRCReconfigurationComplete)消息,表示切换成功。Understandably, the terminal performs random access to perform time alignment (TA) with RAN Node 2 and then completes uplink synchronization with RAN Node 2. After successfully completing random access, the terminal can also send a reconfiguration complete (RRCReconfigurationComplete) message to RAN Node 2 to indicate a successful handover.

可以理解的,根据目前的切换机制,主要靠RAN节点为终端配置测量参数,根据终端的测量结果确定终端是否进行小区切换。而在具体应用中,终端具备移动性,终端位置和/或运动状态会不断发生变化,所以RAN节点配置的测量参数可能不再合适位置和/或运动状态发生变化的终端。例如,当终端在小区边缘高速移动时,如果timeToTrigger的值配置得较大,会导致测量结果不容易满足切换对应的测量事件(例如,A2或A3事件等)的进入条件(具体参考表1的第三列“进入条件”),也就不容易让终端上报测量报告,导致不容易让终端及时进行小区切换。又例如,可能出现终端已经离开合适的小区时才发生切换的情况,会影响终端的通信质量。又例如,当终端从小区中心向小区边缘的方向高速移动时,测量门限也可能变得不再合适。又例如,终端位于两个小区边缘时,因为测量门限或者timeToTrigger设置得不合适,导致终端发生乒乓切换(即,终端在两个小区之间反复切换)。又例如,终端在进行站间切换时,因为切换时延过长而导致切换失败。综上,目前的切换机制灵活性较差,难以满足用户需求。Understandably, under the current handover mechanism, the RAN node primarily configures measurement parameters for the terminal, and determines whether the terminal should perform a cell handover based on the measurement results. However, in practical applications, terminals are mobile, and their location and/or movement state constantly change. Therefore, the measurement parameters configured by the RAN node may no longer be suitable for terminals whose location and/or movement state have changed. For example, when a terminal moves at high speed at the cell edge, if the value of timeToTrigger is configured too large, the measurement results may not easily meet the entry conditions for the corresponding handover measurement event (e.g., A2 or A3 events, etc.) (see the third column "Entry Conditions" in Table 1 for details), making it difficult for the terminal to report measurement reports and thus hindering timely cell handover. Furthermore, handover may occur only after the terminal has left a suitable cell, affecting the terminal's communication quality. Also, when a terminal moves at high speed from the cell center towards the cell edge, the measurement threshold may become inappropriate. Finally, when a terminal is located at the edges of two cells, an inappropriate setting of the measurement threshold or timeToTrigger may cause ping-pong handover (i.e., the terminal repeatedly switches between two cells). For example, during inter-site handover, the handover may fail due to excessive handover latency. In summary, the current handover mechanism lacks flexibility and fails to meet user needs.

为了解决上述问题,本申请提供3种通信方法,下面进行具体阐述。To address the aforementioned issues, this application provides three communication methods, which are described in detail below.

方法1:核心网网元感知终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生变化,并向终端或RAN节点发送终端状态信息。相应的,终端或RAN节点接收到终端的状态信息后,可以根据终端的状态信息确定用于小区切换的测量信息。上述终端状态信息指示终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生变化。Method 1: The core network element senses a change in at least one of the terminal's position or its speed and sends terminal status information to the terminal or RAN node. Accordingly, upon receiving the terminal's status information, the terminal or RAN node can determine the measurement information needed for cell handover based on the terminal's status information. The aforementioned terminal status information indicates a change in at least one of the terminal's position or its speed.

在上述方法中,核心网网元可以感知终端的位置或运动速度发生变化,并通过终端状态信息将该变化指示给终端或RAN节点,使得终端或RAN节点可以根据终端位置或运动速度的变化确定用于切换的测量参数。与目前由RAN节点配置终端测量参数、并由终端上报测量报告触发切换的方式相比,上述方法可以使终端或RAN节点根据终端位置或运动速度对终端的移动性进行管理,避免了由于终端的移动造成测量参数可能配置得不合理的问题,从而能够更灵活地让终端进行切换,进而提高通信质量,满足用户需求。方法1的具体过程将在下述图4所示的方法中进行具体阐述。In the above method, core network elements can sense changes in the terminal's position or speed and indicate these changes to the terminal or RAN node via terminal status information. This allows the terminal or RAN node to determine the measurement parameters for handover based on the changes in the terminal's position or speed. Compared to the current method where the RAN node configures terminal measurement parameters and the terminal reports measurement data to trigger handover, this method allows the terminal or RAN node to manage terminal mobility based on its position or speed. This avoids the problem of potentially inappropriate measurement parameter configuration due to terminal movement, enabling more flexible handover and thus improving communication quality to meet user needs. The specific process of Method 1 will be described in detail in the method shown in Figure 4 below.

方法2:第一RAN节点向核心网网元发送小区切换信息。其中,小区切换信息包括将终端切换至第一小区的条件信息。相应的,核心网网元接收来自第一RAN节点的小区切换信息,确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量,根据小区切换信息和终端针对第一小区的信号质量,向第一RAN节点发送第一信息,该第一信息指示将终端切换至第一小区。相应的,第一RAN节点接收第一信息。Method 2: The first RAN node sends cell handover information to the core network element. This cell handover information includes condition information for handing the terminal to the first cell. Accordingly, the core network element receives the cell handover information from the first RAN node, determines the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell, and, based on the cell handover information and the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell, sends first information to the first RAN node, indicating that the terminal should be handed to the first cell. The first RAN node receives the first information.

在上述方法中,核心网网元能够根据终端针对第一小区的信号质量,结合将终端切换至第一小区的条件信息,确定是否将终端切换至第一小区。因此,该方法能够灵活地对终端的移动性进行管理,也避免了目前由于终端的移动造成RAN节点配置的测量参数可能不合理的问题,可以更灵活地让终端进行切换,进而提高通信质量,满足用户需求。方法2的具体过程将在下述图5所示的方法中进行具体阐述。In the above method, the core network element can determine whether to hand over the terminal to the first cell based on the terminal's signal quality for the first cell and the conditions for handing over the terminal to the first cell. Therefore, this method can flexibly manage terminal mobility and avoids the current problem of potentially unreasonable measurement parameters configured in the RAN nodes due to terminal movement. It allows for more flexible terminal handover, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs. The specific process of Method 2 will be described in detail in the method shown in Figure 5 below.

方法3:第二RAN节点向第一RAN节点发送第一信息。相应的,第一RAN节点接收来自第二RAN节点的第一信息。该第一信息指示以下至少一项:第一小区的第一波束或终端针对第一RAN节点的定时提前量。其中,第一RAN节点管理的小区包括第一小区,第一小区为所述终端切换的目标小区,第一波束用于终端切换至第一小区后与第一小区通信,定时提前量用于终端切换至第一小区后进行上行同步;第一信息是根据第二信息确定的,第二信息包括以下至少一项:终端对第一小区的测量结果、终端的位置信息或终端的运动速度。Method 3: The second RAN node sends first information to the first RAN node. Correspondingly, the first RAN node receives the first information from the second RAN node. This first information indicates at least one of the following: a first beam of the first cell or a timing advance of the terminal relative to the first RAN node. The cells managed by the first RAN node include the first cell, which is the target cell for the terminal's handover. The first beam is used for communication with the first cell after the terminal hands over, and the timing advance is used for uplink synchronization after the terminal hands over to the first cell. The first information is determined based on second information, which includes at least one of the following: the terminal's measurement results of the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's movement speed.

在上述方法中,第二RAN节点能够根据终端对第一小区的测量结果、终端的位置信息或终端的运动速度中的至少一项确定第一波束,和/或,终端切换到第一RAN节点管理的第一小区会用到的定时提前量信息。如此,第一RAN节点可以通过第一波束与终端通信,不进行波束对齐就能确定合适的波束,所以可以降低切换时延。此外,获取该定时提前量后,终端能够快速实现与第一RAN节点的上行同步,进而快速地切换到第一小区,从而大大降低终端切换的时延。因此,通过上述方法能够有效降低切换时延,能够降低更灵活地让终端进行切换,进而提高通信质量,满足用户需求。方法3的具体过程将在下述图6所示的方法中进行具体阐述。In the above method, the second RAN node can determine the first beam based on at least one of the terminal's measurement results of the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's movement speed, and/or the timing advance information used by the terminal when switching to the first cell managed by the first RAN node. Thus, the first RAN node can communicate with the terminal through the first beam and determine a suitable beam without beam alignment, thereby reducing handover latency. Furthermore, after obtaining this timing advance, the terminal can quickly achieve uplink synchronization with the first RAN node and quickly switch to the first cell, significantly reducing handover latency. Therefore, the above method effectively reduces handover latency, allows for more flexible handover, improves communication quality, and meets user needs. The specific process of method 3 will be described in detail in the method shown in Figure 6 below.

下面结合附图对上述方法的实施方式进行详细描述。The implementation of the above method will now be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings.

本申请提供的方法可用于各种通信系统。例如该通信系统可以为通用移动通讯系统(universal mobile telecommunications system,UMTS)系统、长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、5G通信系统、无线保真(wireless fidelity,WiFi)系统、第三代合作伙伴计划(3rd generation partnership project,3GPP)相关的通信系统、5G之后演进的通信系统(如:第六代(6th generation,6G)通信系统)、或多种系统融合的系统等,不予限制。其中,5G还可以称为新无线(new radio,NR)。下面以图2所示通信系统20为例,对本申请提供的方法进行描述。图2仅为示意图,并不构成对本申请提供的技术方案的适用场景的限定。The method provided in this application can be used in various communication systems. For example, the communication system can be a Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) system, a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system, a 5G communication system, a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) system, a 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) related communication system, a communication system evolved after 5G (such as a 6th generation (6G) communication system), or a system integrating multiple systems, etc., without limitation. 5G can also be referred to as New Radio (NR). The method provided in this application is described below using the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2 as an example. Figure 2 is only a schematic diagram and does not constitute a limitation on the applicable scenarios of the technical solution provided in this application.

如图2所示,为本申请提供的通信系统20的架构示意图。图2中,通信系统20包括RAN 201。可选的,通信系统20还包括核心网(core network,CN)204。RAN 201包括至少一个RAN节点(如图2中的202a和202b,统称为202)和至少一个终端(如图2中的203a-203j,统称为203)。RAN 201中还可以包括其它RAN节点,例如,无线中继设备和/或无线回传设备(图2中未示出)等。终端203通过无线的方式与RAN节点202相连。RAN节点202通过无线或有线方式与核心网204连接。核心网204中的核心网设备与RAN 201中的RAN节点202可以分别是不同的物理设备,也可以是集成了核心网逻辑功能和RAN逻辑功能的同一个物理设备。Figure 2 shows a schematic diagram of the architecture of the communication system 20 provided in this application. In Figure 2, the communication system 20 includes a RAN 201. Optionally, the communication system 20 also includes a core network (CN) 204. RAN 201 includes at least one RAN node (202a and 202b in Figure 2, collectively referred to as 202) and at least one terminal (203a-203j in Figure 2, collectively referred to as 203). RAN 201 may also include other RAN nodes, such as wireless relay devices and/or wireless backhaul devices (not shown in Figure 2). Terminal 203 is wirelessly connected to RAN node 202. RAN node 202 is wirelessly or wiredly connected to core network 204. The core network equipment in core network 204 and RAN node 202 in RAN 201 can be different physical devices, or they can be the same physical device integrating core network logical functions and RAN logical functions.

RAN 201可以为3GPP相关的蜂窝系统,例如,4G、5G移动通信系统、或面向未来的演进系统(例如6G移动通信系统)。RAN 201还可以是开放式接入网(open RAN,O-RAN或ORAN)、云无线接入网络(cloud radio access network,CRAN)、或者WiFi系统。RAN 201还可以是以上两种或两种以上系统融合的通信系统。其中,核心网可以包括用于实现各种核心网功能的网元,例如包括SF网元。SF网元也可以称为感知网元,可以进行感知设备(例如,终端或RAN节点等)的选择、感知业务的控制、感知测量数据的接收与整合,输出感知结果等工作。RAN 201 can be a 3GPP-related cellular system, such as a 4G or 5G mobile communication system, or a future-oriented evolution system (such as a 6G mobile communication system). RAN 201 can also be an open access network (O-RAN or ORAN), a cloud radio access network (CRAN), or a WiFi system. RAN 201 can also be a communication system integrating two or more of the above systems. The core network can include network elements used to implement various core network functions, such as SF network elements. SF network elements, also known as sensing network elements, can perform tasks such as selecting sensing devices (e.g., terminals or RAN nodes), controlling sensing services, receiving and integrating sensing measurement data, and outputting sensing results.

RAN节点202,有时也可以称为接入网设备,RAN实体或接入节点等,构成通信系统的一部分,用以帮助终端实现无线接入。通信系统20中的多个RAN节点202可以为同一类型的节点,也可以为不同类型的节点。RAN node 202, sometimes also referred to as access network equipment, RAN entity, or access node, constitutes part of the communication system and is used to help terminals achieve wireless access. Multiple RAN nodes 202 in the communication system 20 can be of the same type or different types.

在一种可能的场景中,RAN节点可以是基站(base station)、演进型基站(evolved NodeB,eNodeB)、接入点(access point,AP)、发送接收点(transmission reception point,TRP)、下一代基站(next generation NodeB,gNB)、6G移动通信系统中的下一代基站、未来移动通信系统中的基站、或WiFi系统中的接入节点等。RAN节点可以是宏基站(如图2中的220a)、微基站或室内站(如图2中的220b)、中继节点或施主节点、或者是CRAN场景下的无线控制器。可选的,RAN节点还可以是服务器,可穿戴设备,车辆或车载设备等。例如,车辆外联(vehicle to everything,V2X)技术中的接入网设备可以为路侧单元(road side unit,RSU)。在一些场景下,RAN节点220和终端220的角色是相对的,例如,通常被配置为终端的直升机或无人机,也可以被配置成移动基站,通过直升机或无人机接入到RAN的设备被配置为终端。In one possible scenario, a RAN node can be a base station, an evolved NodeB (eNodeB), an access point (AP), a transmission reception point (TRP), a next-generation NodeB (gNB), a next-generation base station in a 6G mobile communication system, a base station in a future mobile communication system, or an access node in a WiFi system. A RAN node can be a macro base station (as shown in Figure 2, 220a), a micro base station or indoor station (as shown in Figure 2, 220b), a relay node or donor node, or a radio controller in a CRAN scenario. Optionally, a RAN node can also be a server, wearable device, vehicle, or in-vehicle equipment. For example, the access network equipment in vehicle-to-everything (V2X) technology can be a roadside unit (RSU). In some scenarios, the roles of RAN node 220 and terminal 220 are relative. For example, a helicopter or drone that is usually configured as a terminal can also be configured as a mobile base station, and a device that accesses the RAN via a helicopter or drone is configured as a terminal.

在另一种可能的场景中,由多个RAN节点协作协助终端实现无线接入,不同RAN节点分别实现基站的部分功能。例如,RAN节点可以是集中式单元(central unit,CU),分布式单元(distributed unit,DU),CU-控制面(control plane,CP),CU-用户面(user plane,UP),或者无线单元(radio unit,RU)等。CU和DU可以是单独设置,或者也可以包括在同一个网元中,例如基带单元(baseband unit,BBU)中。RU可以包括在射频设备或者射频单元中,例如包括在射频拉远单元(remote radio unit,RRU)、有源天线处理单元(active antenna unit,AAU)或远程射频头(remote radio head,RRH)中。In another possible scenario, multiple RAN nodes collaborate to assist the terminal in achieving wireless access, with each RAN node performing a portion of the base station's functions. For example, RAN nodes can be central units (CUs), distributed units (DUs), CU-control plane (CPs), CU-user plane (UPs), or radio units (RUs). CUs and DUs can be separate entities or included in the same network element, such as a baseband unit (BBU). RUs can be included in radio frequency equipment or radio frequency units, such as remote radio units (RRUs), active antenna units (AAUs), or remote radio heads (RRHs).

在不同系统中,CU(或CU-CP和CU-UP)、DU或RU也可以有不同的名称,但是本领域的技术人员可以理解其含义。例如,在ORAN系统中,CU也可以称为O-CU(开放式CU),DU也可以称为O-DU,CU-CP也可以称为O-CU-CP,CU-UP也可以称为O-CU-UP,RU也可以称为O-RU。为描述方便,本申请中以CU,CU-CP,CU-UP、DU和RU为例进行描述。本申请中的CU(或CU-CP、CU-UP)、DU和RU中的任一单元,可以是通过软件模块、硬件模块、或者软件模块与硬件模块结合来实现。In different systems, CU (or CU-CP and CU-UP), DU, or RU may have different names, but those skilled in the art will understand their meaning. For example, in an ORAN system, CU can also be called O-CU (open CU), DU can also be called O-DU, CU-CP can also be called O-CU-CP, CU-UP can also be called O-CU-UP, and RU can also be called O-RU. For ease of description, this application uses CU, CU-CP, CU-UP, DU, and RU as examples. Any of the units among CU (or CU-CP, CU-UP), DU, and RU in this application can be implemented through software modules, hardware modules, or a combination of software and hardware modules.

本申请中的终端,例如:终端203是一种具有无线收发功能的设备。终端可以部署在陆地上,包括室内、室外、手持或车载;也可以部署在水面上(如轮船等);还可以部署在空中(例如飞机、气球和卫星上等)。终端还可以称为终端设备,终端设备可以是用户设备(user equipment,UE)、移动台(mobile station,MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal,MT)等,或是用于向用户提供语音或数据连通性的设备。其中,UE包括具有无线通信功能的手持式设备、车载设备(例如,汽车、自行车、电动车、飞机、船舶、火车、高铁等)、可穿戴设备(例如智能手表、智能手环、计步器等)或计算设备。示例性地,UE可以是手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device,MID)、卫星终端或带无线收发功能的电脑。UE还可以是虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)终端设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)终端设备、无线调制解调器(modem)、智能销售点(point of sale,POS)机、客户终端设备(customer-premises equipment,CPE)、智能机器人、机械臂、车间设备、智能家居设备(例如,冰箱、电视、空调、电表等)、工业控制中的无线终端、无人驾驶中的无线终端、远程医疗中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、车载终端、具有终端功能的路边单元(road side unit,RSU)、或飞行设备(例如,智能机器人、热气球、无人机、飞机)等等。终端还可以是其他具有终端功能的设备,例如,终端还可以是D2D通信中担任终端功能的设备。The terminal in this application, such as terminal 203, is a device with wireless transceiver capabilities. The terminal can be deployed on land, including indoors, outdoors, handheld, or vehicle-mounted; it can also be deployed on water (such as on ships); and it can be deployed in the air (such as on airplanes, balloons, and satellites). The terminal can also be referred to as a terminal device, which can be a user equipment (UE), a mobile station (MS), a mobile terminal (MT), or a device used to provide voice or data connectivity to users. The UE includes handheld devices with wireless communication capabilities, vehicle-mounted devices (e.g., cars, bicycles, electric vehicles, airplanes, ships, trains, high-speed trains, etc.), wearable devices (e.g., smartwatches, smart bracelets, pedometers, etc.), or computing devices. Exemplarily, the UE can be a mobile phone, tablet computer, laptop computer, PDA, mobile internet device (MID), satellite terminal, or computer with wireless transceiver capabilities. UE can also be a virtual reality (VR) terminal device, an augmented reality (AR) terminal device, a wireless modem, a point-of-sale (POS) machine, a customer-premises equipment (CPE), a smart robot, a robotic arm, workshop equipment, smart home devices (e.g., refrigerators, televisions, air conditioners, electricity meters, etc.), a wireless terminal in industrial control, a wireless terminal in autonomous driving, a wireless terminal in telemedicine, a wireless terminal in a smart grid, a wireless terminal in transportation safety, a wireless terminal in a smart city, a wireless terminal in a smart home, a vehicle-mounted terminal, a roadside unit (RSU) with terminal functionality, or a flying device (e.g., a smart robot, a hot air balloon, a drone, an airplane), etc. A terminal can also be other devices with terminal functionality; for example, a terminal can also be a device that performs terminal functionality in D2D communication.

作为示例而非限定,在本申请中,终端可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备也可以称为穿戴式智能设备,是应用穿戴式技术对日常穿戴进行智能化设计、开发出可以穿戴的设备的总称,如眼镜、手套、手表、服饰及鞋等。可穿戴设备即直接穿在身上,或是整合到用户的衣服或配件的一种便携式设备。例如,可穿戴设备不仅仅是一种硬件设备,更是通过软件支持以及数据交互、云端交互来实现强大的功能的设备。广义穿戴式智能设备包括功能全、尺寸大、可不依赖智能手机实现完整或者部分的功能的设备,例如:智能手表或智能眼镜等,以及包括只专注于某一类应用功能,需要和其它设备如智能手机配合使用的设备,如各类进行体征监测的智能手环、智能首饰等。By way of example and not limitation, in this application, the terminal can be a wearable device. Wearable devices, also known as wearable smart devices, are a general term for devices that utilize wearable technology to intelligently design and develop everyday wearables, such as glasses, gloves, watches, clothing, and shoes. Wearable devices are portable devices that are worn directly on the body or integrated into a user's clothing or accessories. For example, wearable devices are not merely hardware devices, but also devices that achieve powerful functions through software support, data interaction, and cloud interaction. Broadly speaking, wearable smart devices include devices that are feature-rich, large in size, and can achieve complete or partial functions without relying on a smartphone, such as smartwatches or smart glasses, as well as devices that focus on only one type of application function and need to be used in conjunction with other devices such as smartphones, such as various smart bracelets and smart jewelry for vital sign monitoring.

在本申请中,终端可以是物联网(internet of things,IoT)系统中的终端,IoT是未来信息技术发展的重要组成部分,其主要技术特点是将物品通过通信技术与网络连接,从而实现人机互连,物物互连的智能化网络。本申请中的终端可以是机器类型通信(machine type communication,MTC)中的终端。In this application, the terminal can be a terminal in an Internet of Things (IoT) system. IoT is an important component of future information technology development, and its main technical feature is connecting objects to networks through communication technologies, thereby realizing an intelligent network of human-machine interconnection and machine-to-machine interconnection. The terminal in this application can be a terminal in machine-type communication (MTC).

本申请的终端可以是作为一个或多个部件或者单元而内置于车辆的车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片、车载单元(on-board unit,OBU)或车联网终端盒子(telematics box,T-BOX),车辆通过内置的所述车载模块、车载模组、车载部件、车载芯片、车载单元或者T-BOX可以实施本申请的方法。终端还可以是整车装置。因此,本申请可以应用于车联网,例如车辆外联(vehicle to everything,V2X)、车间通信长期演进技术(long term evolution vehicle,LTE-V)、车到车(vehicle to vehicle,V2V)等。The terminal in this application can be an on-board module, on-board component, on-board chip, on-board unit (OBU), or telematics box (T-BOX) built into a vehicle as one or more components or units. The vehicle can implement the methods of this application through the built-in on-board module, on-board component, on-board chip, on-board unit, or T-BOX. The terminal can also be a complete vehicle device. Therefore, this application can be applied to vehicle networking, such as vehicle-to-everything (V2X), long-term evolution vehicle (LTE-V), and vehicle-to-vehicle (V2V).

可以理解的,上述通信系统20可以适用于多种通信网络,例如可以适用于目前正在讨论的5G网络,也可以适用于未来的其他网络等,本申请实施例对此不做具体限定。It is understood that the above-mentioned communication system 20 can be applied to a variety of communication networks, such as the 5G network currently under discussion, or other future networks, etc. This application embodiment does not specifically limit it in this regard.

可以理解的,图2所示的通信系统20仅用于举例,并非用于限制本申请的技术方案。本领域的技术人员应当明白,在具体实现过程中,通信系统20还可以包括其他设备,同时也可根据具体需要来确定RAN节点和终端的数量,不予限制。It is understood that the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2 is for illustrative purposes only and is not intended to limit the technical solutions of this application. Those skilled in the art should understand that in specific implementations, the communication system 20 may also include other devices, and the number of RAN nodes and terminals may be determined according to specific needs without limitation.

可选的,本申请图2中的各网元或设备(例如RAN节点、终端或核心网网元等)也可以称之为通信装置,其可以是一个通用设备或者是一个专用设备,本申请对此不作具体限定。Optionally, each network element or device (such as RAN node, terminal or core network element, etc.) in Figure 2 of this application may also be referred to as a communication device, which may be a general-purpose device or a special-purpose device. This application does not make specific limitations on this.

可选的,本申请图2中的各网元或设备(例如RAN节点202、终端203或核心网204的网元)的相关功能可以由一个设备实现,也可以由多个设备共同实现,还可以是由一个设备内的一个或多个功能模块实现,本申请对此不作具体限定。可以理解的是,上述功能既可以是硬件设备中的网络元件,也可以是在专用硬件上运行的软件功能,或者硬件与软件的结合,或者平台(例如,云平台)上实例化的虚拟化功能。Optionally, the functions of each network element or device (e.g., RAN node 202, terminal 203, or core network element 204) in Figure 2 of this application can be implemented by one device, multiple devices working together, or one or more functional modules within a single device. This application does not impose specific limitations on these functions. It is understood that the aforementioned functions can be network elements in hardware devices, software functions running on dedicated hardware, a combination of hardware and software, or virtualization functions instantiated on a platform (e.g., a cloud platform).

在具体实现时,图2所示的各网元或设备(例如RAN节点202或终端203或核心网204的网元等)都可以采用图3所示的组成结构,或者包括图3所示的部件。图3所示为可适用于本申请的通信装置的硬件结构示意图。可以理解的是,通信装置30包括例如模块、单元、元件、电路、或接口等必要形式的means,以适当地配置在一起以执行本申请提供的方案。例如,通信装置30包括一个或多个处理器301,用于实现本申请提供的方法。In practical implementation, each network element or device shown in Figure 2 (e.g., RAN node 202, terminal 203, or core network element 204) can adopt the composition structure shown in Figure 3, or include the components shown in Figure 3. Figure 3 shows a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a communication device applicable to this application. It is understood that the communication device 30 includes means of necessary forms such as modules, units, elements, circuits, or interfaces, which are appropriately configured together to execute the solution provided in this application. For example, the communication device 30 includes one or more processors 301 for implementing the method provided in this application.

处理器301可以是通用处理器或者专用处理器等。例如,处理器301可以是基带处理器或中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)。基带处理器可以用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理,中央处理器可以用于对通信装置30(如RAN节点、终端、或芯片等)进行控制,执行软件程序,处理软件程序的数据。可选的,在一种设计中,处理器301可以包括程序305(有时也可以称为代码或指令),程序305可以在处理器301上被运行,使得通信装置30执行下述实施例中描述的方法。在又一种可能的设计中,通信装置30包括电路(图3未示出),所述电路用于实现下述实施例中的终端或RAN节点或核心网网元功能。Processor 301 can be a general-purpose processor or a dedicated processor. For example, processor 301 can be a baseband processor or a central processing unit (CPU). The baseband processor can be used to process communication protocols and communication data, while the CPU can be used to control the communication device 30 (such as a RAN node, terminal, or chip), execute software programs, and process data from the software programs. Optionally, in one design, processor 301 may include program 305 (sometimes referred to as code or instructions), which can be run on processor 301 to cause the communication device 30 to perform the methods described in the following embodiments. In yet another possible design, communication device 30 includes circuitry (not shown in FIG3) for implementing the terminal, RAN node, or core network element functions described in the following embodiments.

可选的,通信装置30中可以包括一个或多个存储器303。存储器303可以是只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备,随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、高速缓存(cache)或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备,也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器(electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,但不限于此。本申请提供的存储器通常可以具有非易失性。可选的,存储器303上存有程序307(有时也可以称为代码或指令),程序307可在处理器301上被运行,使得通信装置30执行下述方法实施例中描述的方法。Optionally, the communication device 30 may include one or more memories 303. The memory 303 may be a read-only memory (ROM) or other type of static storage device capable of storing static information and instructions, random access memory (RAM), cache, or other type of dynamic storage device capable of storing information and instructions. It may also be an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), a compact disc read-only memory (CD-ROM), or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compressed optical discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital universal optical discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disk storage media, or other magnetic storage devices, or any other medium capable of carrying or storing desired program code in the form of instructions or data structures that can be accessed by a computer, but is not limited thereto. The memory provided in this application may generally be non-volatile. Optionally, the memory 303 stores a program 307 (sometimes referred to as code or instructions), which can be run on the processor 301 to cause the communication device 30 to perform the methods described in the following method embodiments.

可选的,处理器301中可以包括AI模块306,和/或,存储器303中可以包括AI模块308。上述AI模块用于实现AI相关的功能。AI模块可以是通过软件,硬件,或软硬结合的方式实现。例如,AI模块可以包括RIC模块。例如AI模块可以是近实时RIC或者非实时RIC。Optionally, the processor 301 may include an AI module 306, and/or the memory 303 may include an AI module 308. The aforementioned AI modules are used to implement AI-related functions. The AI modules can be implemented through software, hardware, or a combination of both. For example, the AI module may include a RIC module. For example, the AI module can be a near real-time RIC or a non-real-time RIC.

可选的,处理器301和/或存储器303中还可以存储有数据。处理器301和存储器303可以单独设置,也可以集成在一起。Optionally, data may also be stored in the processor 301 and/or the memory 303. The processor 301 and the memory 303 may be configured separately or integrated together.

可选的,通信装置30还可以包括收发器302和/或天线304。处理器301有时也可以称为处理单元,对通信装置30进行控制。收发器302有时也可以称为收发单元、收发机、收发电路或者收发器等,用于通过天线304实现通信装置30的收发功能。Optionally, the communication device 30 may also include a transceiver 302 and/or an antenna 304. The processor 301, sometimes referred to as a processing unit, controls the communication device 30. The transceiver 302, sometimes referred to as a transceiver unit, transceiver, transceiver circuit, or transceiver, is used to realize the transmission and reception functions of the communication device 30 through the antenna 304.

可以理解的,图3中示出的组成结构并不构成对该通信装置的限定,除图3所示部件之外,该通信装置可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。It is understood that the composition shown in Figure 3 does not constitute a limitation on the communication device. In addition to the components shown in Figure 3, the communication device may include more or fewer components than shown, or combine certain components, or have different component arrangements.

可以理解的是,本申请下述实施例中各个网元之间的消息名字或消息中各参数的名字等只是一个示例,具体实现中也可以是其他的名字,本申请对此不作具体限定。It is understood that the message names between network elements or the names of parameters in the messages in the following embodiments of this application are just examples, and other names may be used in the specific implementation. This application does not make any specific limitations on this.

可以理解的是,在本申请中,“/”可以表示前后关联的对象是一种“或”的关系,例如,A/B可以表示A或B;“和/或”可以用于描述关联对象存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。此外,类似于“A、B和C中的至少一项”或“A、B或C中的至少一项”的表述通常用于表示如下中任一项:单独存在A;单独存在B;单独存在C;同时存在A和B;同时存在A和C;同时存在B和C;同时存在A、B和C。以上是以A、B和C共三个元素进行举例来说明该项目的可选用条目,当表述中具有更多元素时,该表述的含义可以按照前述规则获得。It is understood that in this application, "/" can indicate that the objects before and after it are in an "or" relationship. For example, A/B can mean A or B. "And/or" can be used to describe three relationships between the related objects. For example, A and/or B can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone. Here, A and B can be singular or plural. Furthermore, expressions like "at least one of A, B, and C" or "at least one of A, B, or C" are generally used to indicate any of the following: A exists alone; B exists alone; C exists alone; A and B exist simultaneously; A and C exist simultaneously; B and C exist simultaneously; A, B, and C exist simultaneously. The above examples using three elements (A, B, and C) illustrate the optional entries for this item. When the expression contains more elements, its meaning can be obtained according to the aforementioned rules.

为了便于描述本申请的技术方案,在本申请中,可以采用“第一”、“第二”等字样对功能相同或相似的技术特征进行区分。该“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。在本申请中,“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示例子、例证或说明,被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念,便于理解。To facilitate the description of the technical solutions of this application, the terms "first" and "second" may be used to distinguish technical features with the same or similar functions. The terms "first" and "second" do not limit the number or execution order, nor do they imply that they are necessarily different. In this application, the terms "exemplary" or "for example" are used to indicate examples, illustrations, or descriptions. Any embodiment or design scheme described as "exemplary" or "for example" should not be construed as being more preferred or advantageous than other embodiments or design schemes. The use of "exemplary" or "for example" is intended to present the relevant concepts in a concrete manner for ease of understanding.

可以理解,说明书通篇中提到的“实施例”意味着与实施例有关的特定特征、结构或特性包括在本申请的至少一个实施例中。因此,在整个说明书各个实施例未必一定指相同的实施例。此外,这些特定的特征、结构或特性可以任意适合的方式结合在一个或多个实施例中。可以理解,在本申请的各种实施例中,各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定,而不应对本申请的实施过程构成任何限定。It is understood that the term "embodiment" used throughout the specification means that a specific feature, structure, or characteristic related to an embodiment is included in at least one embodiment of this application. Therefore, various embodiments throughout the specification do not necessarily refer to the same embodiment. Furthermore, these specific features, structures, or characteristics can be combined in any suitable manner in one or more embodiments. It is understood that in the various embodiments of this application, the sequence number of each process does not imply a sequential order of execution; the execution order of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not constitute any limitation on the implementation process of this application.

可以理解,在本申请中,“用于指示”可以包括直接指示和间接指示,也可以包括显式指示和隐式指示。当描述某一指示信息用于指示A时,可以包括该指示信息直接指示A或间接指示A,而并不代表该指示信息中一定携带有A。将某一信息(如下文所述的第一指示信息等)所指示的信息称为待指示信息,则具体实现过程中,对待指示信息进行指示的方式有很多种,例如但不限于,可以直接指示待指示信息,如待指示信息本身或者该待指示信息的索引等。也可以通过指示其他信息来间接指示待指示信息,其中该其他信息与待指示信息之间存在关联关系。还可以仅仅指示待指示信息的一部分,而待指示信息的其他部分则是已知的或者提前约定的。例如,还可以借助预先约定(例如协议规定)的各个信息的排列顺序来实现对特定信息的指示,从而在一定程度上降低指示开销。It is understood that in this application, "for indicating" can include direct and indirect indication, as well as explicit and implicit indication. When describing an indication information as being used to indicate A, it can include whether the indication information directly or indirectly indicates A, but does not necessarily mean that the indication information carries A. The information indicated by a certain piece of information (such as the first indication information described below) is called the information to be indicated. In the specific implementation process, there are many ways to indicate the information to be indicated, such as, but not limited to, directly indicating the information to be indicated, such as the information to be indicated itself or its index. It can also indirectly indicate the information to be indicated by indicating other information, where there is a correlation between the other information and the information to be indicated. It can also indicate only a part of the information to be indicated, while the other parts are known or pre-agreed upon. For example, the indication of specific information can be achieved by using a pre-agreed (e.g., protocol-defined) arrangement of various pieces of information, thereby reducing the indication overhead to some extent.

可以理解,在本申请中,“当……时”、“在……的情况下”、“若”以及“如果”均指在某种客观情况下会做出相应的处理,并非是限定时间,且也不要求实现时一定要有判断的动作,也不意味着存在其它限定。It is understood that in this application, "when," "under the circumstances," "if," and "if" all refer to the corresponding processing that will be carried out under certain objective circumstances, and are not time-limited, nor do they require that there must be a judgment action when implemented, nor do they imply any other limitations.

本申请中,“多个”可以理解为两个或两个以上。例如,“多个定时提前量”可以理解为两个或两个以上定时提前量。In this application, "multiple" can be understood as two or more. For example, "multiple timing advances" can be understood as two or more timing advances.

可以理解,本申请中的一些可选的特征,在某些场景下,可以不依赖于其他特征,比如其当前所基于的方案,而独立实施,解决相应的技术问题,达到相应的效果,也可以在某些场景下,依据需求与其他特征进行结合。相应的,本申请中给出的装置也可以相应的实现这些特征或功能,在此不予赘述。It is understood that some optional features in this application can be implemented independently in certain scenarios without relying on other features, such as the current solution upon which they are based, to solve the corresponding technical problems and achieve the corresponding effects. Alternatively, they can be combined with other features as needed in certain scenarios. Correspondingly, the apparatus provided in this application can also implement these features or functions, which will not be elaborated here.

可以理解的,本申请中同一个步骤或者具有相同功能的步骤或者技术特征在不同实施例之间可以互相参考借鉴。It is understood that the same step or step with the same function or technical feature in this application can be referenced and learned from each other in different embodiments.

可以理解的,本申请所涉及的用户个人信息的处理,如收集、存储、使用、加工、传输、提供和公开等,均符合相关法律法规的规定,且不违背公序良俗。例如,本申请中,对用户个人信息处理是在用户授权的情况下进行的,在此统一说明,以下不再赘述。It is understood that the processing of user personal information involved in this application, such as collection, storage, use, processing, transmission, provision, and disclosure, all comply with relevant laws and regulations and do not violate public order and good morals. For example, in this application, the processing of user personal information is carried out with the user's authorization, which will be stated uniformly here and will not be repeated below.

可以理解的,本申请下述提供的方法中是以核心网网元、RAN节点和终端作为该交互示意的执行主体为例来示意该方法,但本申请并不限制该交互示意的执行主体。例如,本申请下述实施例提供的方法中的核心网网元也可以是支持该核心网网元实现该方法的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器,还可以是能实现全部或部分核心网网元功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件;本申请下述提供的方法中的RAN节点也可以是支持该RAN节点实现该方法的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器,还可以是能实现全部或部分RAN节点功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件;本申请下述提供的方法中的终端也可以是支持该终端实现该方法的芯片、芯片系统、或处理器,还可以是能实现全部或部分终端功能的逻辑节点、逻辑模块或软件。It is understood that the methods described below in this application use core network elements, RAN nodes, and terminals as examples to illustrate the interaction, but this application does not limit the execution entities of the interaction. For example, the core network element in the method provided in the following embodiments of this application can also be a chip, chip system, or processor that supports the core network element in implementing the method, or it can be a logical node, logical module, or software that can implement all or part of the core network element functions; the RAN node in the method provided below in this application can also be a chip, chip system, or processor that supports the RAN node in implementing the method, or it can be a logical node, logical module, or software that can implement all or part of the RAN node functions; the terminal in the method provided below in this application can also be a chip, chip system, or processor that supports the terminal in implementing the method, or it can be a logical node, logical module, or software that can implement all or part of the terminal functions.

如图4所示,为本申请提供的一种通信方法,该通信方法可以包括如下步骤:As shown in Figure 4, a communication method provided in this application may include the following steps:

S401:核心网网元感知终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生变化。S401: At least one of the following changes: the position of the core network element sensing terminal or the speed of the terminal's movement.

本申请中,核心网网元可以是图2所示通信系统20中的核心网204中的SF网元。终端可以是图2所示的通信系统20中的任意一个终端。In this application, the core network element can be the SF network element in the core network 204 of the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2. The terminal can be any terminal in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2.

上述终端的位置为终端与RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置。该相对位置可理解为,终端在该RAN节点管理的某个小区的中心或边缘,或者终端在不同小区的交界处等,不做限定。该RAN节点为与终端连接的RAN节点,如图2所示通信系统20中的RAN节点202。The location of the terminal mentioned above refers to its relative position to the cell managed by the RAN node. This relative position can be understood as the center or edge of a cell managed by the RAN node, or the boundary between different cells, etc., without limitation. The RAN node is the RAN node connected to the terminal, such as RAN node 202 in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2.

一种可能的实现方式,核心网网元多次获取终端的感知信息(例如,终端的位置或速度等信息),对比新获取的终端的感知信息与之前获取的终端的感知信息,以确定终端的位置或运动速度是否发生变化。One possible implementation is that the core network element repeatedly acquires the terminal's sensing information (e.g., the terminal's position or speed), compares the newly acquired terminal sensing information with the previously acquired terminal sensing information, and determines whether the terminal's position or speed has changed.

其中,感知信息可以是来自终端的测量信息,核心网网元根据测量信息获取终端的感知信息。例如,核心网网元接收终端发送的测量信息,或者也可以接收RAN节点上报的终端的测量信息,核心网网元可以对该测量信息处理然后得到感知信息。The sensed information can be measurement information from the terminal, and the core network element obtains the terminal's sensed information based on the measurement information. For example, the core network element receives measurement information sent by the terminal, or it can receive measurement information reported by the RAN node from the terminal. The core network element can process the measurement information to obtain the sensed information.

具体的,测量信息是可以包含终端的服务小区或邻区的物理小区标识符(physical cell identifier,PCI)及每个小区或邻区对应的信号质量的,核心网网元可以根据终端上报的测量信息中包含的PCI确定出终端的位置,例如,当终端上报A1测量报告(用于指示小区1作为服务小区信号质量很好)时,可以判断出终端处在小区1的中心。或者,当终端上报A3测量报告(用于指示小区1作为服务小区时,小区1的信号质量低于邻区的信号质量,邻区是小区2),核心网网元可以判断出终端处于小区1与小区2的边缘,甚至终端与小区2中心的距离比终端与小区1中心的距离更近。Specifically, the measurement information can include the physical cell identifier (PCI) of the terminal's serving cell or neighboring cells, as well as the signal quality of each cell or neighboring cell. Core network elements can determine the terminal's location based on the PCI included in the measurement information reported by the terminal. For example, when the terminal reports an A1 measurement report (indicating that cell 1, as the serving cell, has good signal quality), it can be determined that the terminal is located at the center of cell 1. Alternatively, when the terminal reports an A3 measurement report (indicating that when cell 1 is the serving cell, the signal quality of cell 1 is lower than that of the neighboring cell, cell 2), the core network elements can determine that the terminal is located at the edge of cell 1 and cell 2, or even that the distance between the terminal and the center of cell 2 is closer than the distance between the terminal and the center of cell 1.

示例性的,核心网网元可以利用感知地图感知终端的位置或终端的运动速度。具体的,核心网网元可以利用感知地图上不同时刻终端的定位信息确定终端的位置是否变化。核心网网元可以利用感知地图上呈现的终端的当前速度等信息确定终端的速度是否变化。应理解,除了上述终端位置和终端的速度之外,该感知地图还包括其他地理信息,从而能够更方便地获取终端的感知信息。For example, core network elements can use a perception map to sense the location or speed of a terminal. Specifically, core network elements can use the terminal's location information at different times on the perception map to determine whether the terminal's location has changed. Core network elements can use information such as the terminal's current speed presented on the perception map to determine whether the terminal's speed has changed. It should be understood that, in addition to the terminal's location and speed, the perception map also includes other geographic information, thereby enabling more convenient acquisition of the terminal's perception information.

示例性的,由于感知地图可以指示终端的位置、RAN节点的位置或RAN节点管理的小区的位置,因此核心网网元可以通过感知地图获取终端与RAN节点的相对位置,或者获取终端与RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置。例如,核心网网元首先获取终端的感知信息(例如,终端的位置或速度等信息),再结合感知地图指示的RAN节点的位置和RAN节点管理的小区的位置,然后获取终端与RAN节点的相对位置,或者终端与RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置。For example, since the perception map can indicate the location of the terminal, the location of the RAN node, or the location of the cell managed by the RAN node, core network elements can obtain the relative position of the terminal and the RAN node, or the relative position of the terminal and the cell managed by the RAN node, through the perception map. For instance, the core network element first obtains the terminal's perception information (e.g., the terminal's location or speed), then combines it with the location of the RAN node indicated by the perception map and the location of the cell managed by the RAN node, and then obtains the relative position of the terminal and the RAN node, or the relative position of the terminal and the cell managed by the RAN node.

可选的,RAN节点向核心网网元发送第一信息。其中,第一信息指示RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息,RAN节点管理的小区包括第一小区,第一小区为终端的服务小区,或者服务小区的邻区。核心网网元接收到第一信息后,可以根据第一信息构建感知地图。该感知地图用于确定终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项。可以理解的,为了完善感知地图,核心网网元还可以获取除上述RAN节点之外的RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息,核心网网元还可以获取任意RAN节点和/或任意终端对上述终端的感知结果。其中,任意RAN节点对终端的感知结果可以是该RAN节点通过自发自收,或他发自收的方式感知到的。任意终端对上述终端的感知结果可以是任意终端通过自发自收,或他发自收的方式感知到的,或者是通过传感器感知到的。Optionally, the RAN node sends first information to the core network element. The first information indicates the coverage information of the cells managed by the RAN node. The cells managed by the RAN node include a first cell, which is the serving cell of the terminal or a neighboring cell of the serving cell. After receiving the first information, the core network element can construct a perception map based on the first information. This perception map is used to determine at least one of the terminal's location or its movement speed. It is understood that, to improve the perception map, the core network element can also obtain coverage information of cells managed by RAN nodes other than the aforementioned RAN node, and the core network element can also obtain the perception results of any RAN node and/or any terminal regarding the aforementioned terminal. The perception result of any RAN node regarding the terminal can be obtained by the RAN node through self-transmission and self-reception, or by other-transmission and self-reception. The perception result of any terminal regarding the aforementioned terminal can be obtained by any terminal through self-transmission and self-reception, or by other-transmission and self-reception, or by sensing.

其中,上述覆盖信息可以指示RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖范围。例如,该覆盖信息可以指示RAN节点管理的小区的中心位置,以及该小区的半径。可选的,该覆盖信息还可以指示小区覆盖区域的形状(例如,圆形或扇形等形状)或者其他类型的信息,不做限定。The coverage information mentioned above can indicate the coverage area of a cell managed by the RAN node. For example, the coverage information can indicate the center location of a cell managed by the RAN node, as well as the radius of the cell. Optionally, the coverage information can also indicate the shape of the cell coverage area (e.g., a circular or fan-shaped shape) or other types of information, without limitation.

S402:核心网网元向网络节点发送终端状态信息。相应的,网络节点接收来自核心网网元的终端状态信息。S402: Core network elements send terminal status information to network nodes. Correspondingly, network nodes receive terminal status information from core network elements.

本申请中,网络节点可以是RAN节点或终端。其中,RAN节点可以是图2所示通信系统20中的RAN节点202。终端状态信息指示终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生变化。例如,若在S401中核心网网元感知终端的位置发生变化,则终端状态信息指示终端的位置发生变化。若在S401中核心网网元感知终端的运动速度发生变化,则终端状态信息指示终端的运动速度发生变化。若在S401中核心网网元感知终端的位置和终端的运动速度都发生变化,则终端状态信息指示终端的位置和终端的运动速度都发生变化。In this application, the network node can be a RAN node or a terminal. The RAN node can be RAN node 202 in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2. The terminal status information indicates a change in at least one of the terminal's position or its movement speed. For example, if the core network element senses a change in the terminal's position in S401, the terminal status information indicates that the terminal's position has changed. If the core network element senses a change in the terminal's movement speed in S401, the terminal status information indicates that the terminal's movement speed has changed. If both the core network element senses a change in the terminal's position and its movement speed in S401, the terminal status information indicates that both the terminal's position and its movement speed have changed.

本申请中,核心网网元可以通过携带不同的信息指示终端的位置发生变化,或者指示终端的运动速度发生变化,或者指示终端的位置和运动速度都发生变化。例如,终端状态信息可以包括2个比特,当该2个比特的值为“01”时,指示终端的位置发生变化;当该2个比特的值为“10”时,指示终端的运动速度发生变化;当该2个比特的值为“11”时,指示终端的位置和终端的运动速度都发生变化。可选的,终端状态信息还可以额外指示终端的加速度等其他表征速度变化的参数,不做限定。In this application, core network elements can indicate changes in terminal position, speed, or both by carrying different information. For example, terminal status information may include two bits: a value of "01" indicates a change in terminal position; a value of "10" indicates a change in terminal speed; and a value of "11" indicates a change in both terminal position and speed. Optionally, the terminal status information may also additionally indicate other parameters characterizing speed changes, such as terminal acceleration, without limitation.

可选的,当网络节点为RAN节点时,终端状态信息包括终端的标识符。由此,核心网网元可以通过终端状态信息向RAN节点具体指示位置或运动速度发生变化的终端,便于RAN节点对该标识符对应的终端调节测量参数。Optionally, when the network node is a RAN node, the terminal status information includes the terminal's identifier. Therefore, core network elements can use the terminal status information to specifically indicate to the RAN node which terminal has changed its location or speed, facilitating the RAN node to adjust measurement parameters for the terminal corresponding to that identifier.

S403:网络节点根据终端状态信息确定用于小区切换的测量信息。S403: The network node determines the measurement information used for cell handover based on the terminal status information.

本申请中,用于小区切换的测量信息可以包括以下至少一项:测量周期信息、测量事件的参数信息或第一指示信息。其中,第一指示信息指示是否停止测量等,或者也可以包括其他参数,例如触发时间、测量门限或测量间隙等参数。其中,测量周期可以理解为周期性测量时,终端相邻两次测量之间的时间差。测量事件的参数参考表1与表1中参数的说明。In this application, the measurement information used for cell handover may include at least one of the following: measurement cycle information, parameter information of measurement events, or first indication information. The first indication information indicates whether to stop measurement, or may include other parameters, such as trigger time, measurement threshold, or measurement interval. The measurement cycle can be understood as the time difference between two adjacent measurements by the terminal during periodic measurement. The parameters of the measurement events are described in Table 1.

本申请中,终端和RAN节点根据终端状态信息确定用于小区切换的测量信息的方式类似。不同的是,如果测量信息是RAN节点确定的,RAN节点还可以将确定的测量信息发送给终端,例如,向终端发送第二信息(可选的,该第二信息可以承载于RRC重配置消息),第二信息可以指示RAN节点确定的用于小区切换的测量信息。如此,终端可以基于该测量信息进行测量。示例性的,第二信息可以包括以下至少一项:测量周期信息、测量事件的参数信息或第一指示信息。RAN节点可以定义信元对应第一指示信息,显式地指示终端是否指示停止测量,或者通过重配置信息隐式地指示是否停止测量。例如,当信元MeasIdToRemoveList包括的要移除的测量标识符(对应前述的measID,一个measID绑定一个测量目标ID和测量配置ID)中,若某个measID对应的测量目标ID对应终端所在的服务小区或邻区,终端停止测量。反之,在信元MeasIdToAddModList中包括要添加的测量标识符对应终端所在的服务小区或邻区,终端开始测量。或者,测量信息是终端确定的,由终端自主调整测量信息,这样终端可以根据自身位置或速度的变化直接确定用于小区切换的测量信息,节省信令开销以及与RAN节点交互带来的时延。为了便于描述,下面以网络节点为例介绍根据终端状态信息确定用于小区切换的测量信息的具体过程。In this application, the terminal and RAN node determine the measurement information for cell handover based on the terminal's status information in a similar way. The difference is that if the measurement information is determined by the RAN node, the RAN node can also send the determined measurement information to the terminal, for example, by sending second information (optionally, this second information can be carried in an RRC reconfiguration message). The second information can indicate the measurement information for cell handover determined by the RAN node. Thus, the terminal can perform measurements based on this measurement information. For example, the second information may include at least one of the following: measurement cycle information, parameter information of measurement events, or first indication information. The RAN node can define information elements corresponding to the first indication information to explicitly indicate whether the terminal should stop measurement, or implicitly indicate whether to stop measurement through reconfiguration information. For example, when the information element MeasIdToRemoveList includes measurement identifiers to be removed (corresponding to the aforementioned measID, where one measID is bound to a measurement target ID and a measurement configuration ID), if the measurement target ID corresponding to a certain measID corresponds to the serving cell or neighboring cell where the terminal is located, the terminal stops measurement. Conversely, if the MeasIdToAddModList cell contains the serving cell or neighboring cell corresponding to the measurement identifier to be added, the terminal begins measurement. Alternatively, the measurement information is determined by the terminal itself, which adjusts the measurement information autonomously. This allows the terminal to directly determine the measurement information used for cell handover based on changes in its own position or speed, saving signaling overhead and latency caused by interaction with the RAN node. For ease of description, the following uses a network node as an example to illustrate the specific process of determining the measurement information used for cell handover based on the terminal's state information.

本申请中,终端状态信息还指示终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生的具体变化。例如,终端状态信息指示终端向某个方向移动的距离,或者指示终端的速度变快或变慢了多少。In this application, the terminal status information also indicates a specific change in at least one of the terminal's position or its movement speed. For example, the terminal status information indicates the distance the terminal has moved in a certain direction, or how much the terminal's speed has increased or decreased.

一种可能的实现方式,网络节点根据终端状态信息确定终端的位置,根据终端的位置确定用于小区切换的测量信息。One possible implementation is that network nodes determine the location of the terminal based on the terminal status information, and then determine the measurement information used for cell handover based on the location of the terminal.

可以理解的,终端状态信息可以指示终端的位置发生变化,或者指示终端的运动速度发生变化,或者指示终端的位置和运动速度都发生变化。当终端状态信息指示的内容不同时,网络节点根据终端状态信息确定终端的位置的方式不同,下面进行具体阐述。Understandably, terminal status information can indicate a change in the terminal's location, a change in its speed, or a change in both. When the content indicated by the terminal status information differs, the network node determines the terminal's location differently based on the information, which will be explained in detail below.

场景1:终端状态信息指示终端的位置发生变化。Scenario 1: Terminal status information indicates that the terminal's location has changed.

可以理解的,网络节点可以根据最近一次获取到的终端的位置和终端状态信息指示的位置变化确定终端的位置。Understandably, network nodes can determine the location of a terminal based on the location changes indicated by the most recently acquired terminal location and terminal status information.

场景2:终端状态信息指示终端的运动速度发生变化。Scenario 2: Terminal status information indicates that the terminal's movement speed has changed.

可以理解的,网络节点可以根据最近一次获取到的终端的运动速度、终端状态信息指示的运动速度的变化,以及第一时长确定终端的移动距离,根据终端的移动距离,最近一次获取到的终端的位置和运动方向确定出终端的位置。其中,第一时长为终端最近一次获取到终端的运动速度的时刻,与核心网感知终端运动速度发生变化的时刻之间的时长。Understandably, network nodes can determine the terminal's travel distance based on the most recently acquired terminal speed, changes in the terminal's speed indicated by its status information, and a first time interval. Based on this travel distance, the terminal's location is determined by the most recently acquired position and direction of movement. The first time interval is the time between the moment the terminal most recently acquired its speed and the moment the core network sensed a change in the terminal's speed.

示例性的,以终端以速度v匀速运动为例,根据终端在t1时刻的位置和运动方向,核心网网元可以确定出终端在t2时刻的位置。进而,在获取终端速度变化的基础上,核心网网元根据终端的速度变化可以计算出t1时刻后终端经过的位移,由此可以确定出t1时刻后任一时刻的位置。For example, taking a terminal moving at a constant speed v as an example, based on the terminal's position and direction of motion at time t1, the core network element can determine the terminal's position at time t2. Furthermore, based on the obtained changes in the terminal's speed, the core network element can calculate the displacement traversed by the terminal after time t1, thereby determining the position at any time after time t1.

场景3:终端状态信息指示终端的位置和运动速度发生变化。Scenario 3: Terminal status information indicates changes in the terminal's position and speed of movement.

可以理解的,网络节点可以根据终端状态信息指示的终端的运动速度的变化确定终端的运动方向,根据最近一次获取到的终端的位置、终端的运动方向以及终端状态信息指示的终端的位置的变化确定出终端的位置。Understandably, network nodes can determine the direction of the terminal's movement based on changes in the terminal's speed indicated by the terminal's status information, and determine the terminal's position based on the most recently acquired terminal position, the terminal's direction of movement, and changes in the terminal's position indicated by the terminal's status information.

可选的,核心网网元能够利用上述变化实时地确定终端的位置。Optionally, core network elements can use the aforementioned changes to determine the location of the terminal in real time.

下面对网络节点根据终端的位置确定用于小区切换的测量信息的方法具体说明如下。The method for network nodes to determine measurement information for cell handover based on the location of the terminal is explained in detail below.

一种可能的设计,终端的位置发生变化包括以下至少一项:终端从一个小区的中心向小区的边缘移动,终端从一个小区的边缘向小区的中心移动,终端离开服务小区的覆盖范围,终端进入第一区域,或者,终端的服务小区的覆盖范围发生变化。其中,第一区域由多个小区覆盖。One possible design involves a change in terminal location that includes at least one of the following: the terminal moves from the center of a cell to the edge of the cell; the terminal moves from the edge of a cell to the center of the cell; the terminal leaves the coverage area of the serving cell; the terminal enters a first area; or the coverage area of the serving cell of the terminal changes. The first area is covered by multiple cells.

可以理解的,当终端的位置变化指示终端从一个小区的中心向小区的边缘移动时,应理解终端位于该小区中心时,接收到该小区的信号质量最好,会接入该小区,因此该小区是终端的是服务小区。当终端从服务小区中心向边缘移动时,终端接收到服务小区的信号质量逐渐变低,而接收到其他邻区的信号质量会变高,为了保障终端通信质量,网络节点可以让终端切换到其他信号质量更好的邻区。在这种情况下,网络节点可以调整终端的测量参数。Understandably, when a terminal's location changes, indicating it's moving from the center of a cell to its edge, it's understood that the terminal receives the best signal quality when at the cell center and will connect to that cell; therefore, that cell is the terminal's serving cell. As the terminal moves from the serving cell center to the edge, the signal quality received from the serving cell gradually decreases, while the signal quality from other neighboring cells increases. To ensure communication quality, network nodes can allow the terminal to switch to neighboring cells with better signal quality. In this situation, the network node can adjust the terminal's measurement parameters.

具体的,若此时终端处于停止测量的状态,网络节点可以开启终端的测量。或者,网络节点可以为终端配置更小的测量周期,即让终端更频繁地进行测量,以便于更好获取信号质量的变化情况。或者,当配置了测量间隙(measurement gap)时,网络节点为终端配置测量间隙的持续时间变长,这也是为了让终端更多地进行测量。或者,网络节点可以降低测量事件对应的触发时间(timeToTrigger)。或者,网络节点可以具体根据终端的邻区部署情况以及终端距离小区边缘的位置调节测量门限。例如,当终端位于服务小区范围内时,提高测量事件(例如,A2或A3等测量事件)对应的门限,使终端不容易切换;当终端接近服务小区边缘时,降低测量事件对应的门限,使终端更容易切换。Specifically, if the terminal is in a stopped measurement state, the network node can enable the terminal's measurement. Alternatively, the network node can configure a shorter measurement cycle for the terminal, allowing it to perform measurements more frequently to better capture changes in signal quality. Or, when a measurement gap is configured, the network node can configure a longer duration for the measurement gap to encourage more measurements. Alternatively, the network node can reduce the timeToTrigger for measurement events. Or, the network node can adjust the measurement threshold based on the terminal's neighbor cell deployment and its distance from the cell edge. For example, when the terminal is within the serving cell range, the threshold for measurement events (e.g., A2 or A3) can be increased to make handover less difficult; when the terminal is near the serving cell edge, the threshold can be decreased to make handover easier.

可以理解的,当终端的位置变化指示终端从一个小区的边缘向小区的中心移动时,终端接入该小区,且终端接收到该小区的信号质量越来越好,网络节点可以让终端停止测量。或者,网络节点为终端配置更大的测量周期,即降低终端的测量频率。或者,当配置了测量间隙时,网络节点为终端配置测量间隙的持续时间变长。或者,网络节点也可以提高测量事件(例如,A2或A3等测量事件)对应的门限。或者,网络节点也可以提高测量事件对应的触发时间(timeToTrigger)。并且,通过上述方法减少了终端不必要的测量行为,还可以达到为终端节省功耗的目的。Understandably, when a terminal's location change indicates that it is moving from the edge of a cell towards its center, the terminal accesses the cell, and the signal quality received by the terminal from that cell improves. The network node can then allow the terminal to stop measuring. Alternatively, the network node can configure a longer measurement cycle for the terminal, i.e., reduce the terminal's measurement frequency. Or, when a measurement gap is configured, the network node can configure a longer duration for the measurement gap. Alternatively, the network node can also increase the threshold corresponding to measurement events (e.g., measurement events A2 or A3). Or, the network node can also increase the trigger time (timeToTrigger) corresponding to measurement events. Furthermore, by reducing unnecessary measurement activities by the terminal through these methods, power consumption can be saved.

可以理解的,当终端的位置变化指示了终端离开服务小区的覆盖范围时,即使未收到切换对应的测量报告,网络节点也可以提前触发终端切换,这样可以避免终端因离开小区覆盖范围导致信号质量过差而发送测报失败等情况。Understandably, when a change in the terminal's location indicates that the terminal has left the coverage area of the serving cell, the network node can trigger the terminal to switch in advance even if it has not received the corresponding measurement report. This can prevent situations such as the terminal failing to send measurement reports due to poor signal quality caused by leaving the cell's coverage area.

示例性的,当网络节点为终端时,终端检测到此时服务小区和邻区1的信号质量满足测量事件A3的条件,上报测量报告,收到或者未收到RAN节点的切换指示时,都可以将邻区1作为目标小区,切换到邻区1,由此能够及时切换,保证终端的通信质量。For example, when the network node is a terminal, the terminal detects that the signal quality of the serving cell and neighboring cell 1 meets the conditions of measurement event A3, reports a measurement report, and can use neighboring cell 1 as the target cell and switch to neighboring cell 1 whether or not it receives a handover instruction from the RAN node. This enables timely handover and ensures the communication quality of the terminal.

示例性的,当网络节点为RAN节点时,以终端测量报告的情况为下述流程为前提进行说明:终端上报门限1的A2测量报告,随着终端信号变差,终端会继续报出门限2(门限2小于门限1)对应的A2测量报告,RAN节点收到A2测量报告会为终端配置A3测量事件,终端上报A3测量事件后如果能够让终端切换的话,RAN节点让终端切换到目标小区。在上述条件下,RAN节点接收到终端离开服务小区覆盖范围的指示后,即使未收到A3对应的测量报告,即此时刚收到对应门限1或门限2的A2测量报告,或者未收到A2的测量报告,RAN节点都可以触发终端切换,可以根据终端的运动方向判断终端进入了哪个小区的范围,为终端选择目标小区,提前让终端切换,由此达到了灵活地触发终端切换的目的,并且简化信令流程。For example, when the network node is a RAN node, the following process is described based on the terminal measurement report: The terminal reports an A2 measurement report corresponding to threshold 1. As the terminal signal deteriorates, the terminal will continue to report an A2 measurement report corresponding to threshold 2 (threshold 2 is less than threshold 1). Upon receiving the A2 measurement report, the RAN node will configure an A3 measurement event for the terminal. If the terminal can be switched after reporting the A3 measurement event, the RAN node will switch the terminal to the target cell. Under the above conditions, after the RAN node receives an indication that the terminal has left the coverage area of the serving cell, even if it has not received the measurement report corresponding to A3 (i.e., it has just received the A2 measurement report corresponding to threshold 1 or threshold 2, or has not received the A2 measurement report at all), the RAN node can trigger the terminal switch. It can determine which cell the terminal has entered based on the direction of the terminal's movement, select a target cell for the terminal, and switch the terminal in advance. This achieves the purpose of flexibly triggering the terminal switch and simplifies the signaling process.

或者,当网络节点为RAN节点时,RAN节点在收到终端离开服务小区的覆盖范围的指示时,也可以等待终端的测量报告再进行切换。RAN节点也可以通过调节测量参数的目的让终端更容易上报测量报告,例如,降低测量事件对应的触发时间(timeToTrigger),或者降低测量事件对应的门限,应理解具体调节的数值可以根据终端与小区的相对位置确定,不作限制。Alternatively, when the network node is a RAN node, the RAN node can wait for the terminal's measurement report before handing over when it receives an indication that the terminal has left the coverage area of the serving cell. The RAN node can also make it easier for the terminal to report measurement data by adjusting measurement parameters, such as reducing the trigger time (timeToTrigger) or the threshold for the measurement event. It should be understood that the specific adjustment values can be determined based on the relative position of the terminal and the cell and are not restricted.

可以理解的,当终端的位置变化指示终端进入第一区域时,该第一区域可以理解为多个小区的重叠覆盖区域,由于终端处于该区域时,可能接收到多个邻区的信号质量相差不多,如果不提高切换对应的测量事件的门限,容易发生乒乓切换(由于终端测量到上述多个小区中至少一个小区的信号质量发生一点小小的波动都可能导致切换,所以会发生频繁的切换,这样不仅加重了UE的测量能耗,而且会加重无线网络的负载)。在这种情况下,网络节点可以采取提高触发时间(timeToTrigger),或者,提高测量事件对应的门限等措施,避免终端发生乒乓切换的现象。Understandably, when a terminal's location change indicates that it has entered a first area, this first area can be understood as an overlapping coverage area of multiple cells. Since the terminal may receive signals from multiple neighboring cells with similar signal quality when in this area, ping-pong handovers are likely to occur if the threshold for the measurement event corresponding to the handover is not increased. (Because even a small fluctuation in the signal quality of at least one of the aforementioned cells can lead to handover, frequent handovers occur, which not only increases the UE's measurement power consumption but also increases the load on the wireless network.) In this situation, network nodes can take measures such as increasing the trigger time (timeToTrigger) or increasing the threshold corresponding to the measurement event to avoid ping-pong handovers.

可以理解的,当终端的位置变化指示终端的服务小区的覆盖范围发生变化时,“终端的服务小区的覆盖范围发生变化”可以理解为终端的服务小区发生变化,例如,某些小区被移除RAN节点的管理范围,或者,RAN节点管理的小区增加。Understandably, when a change in the location of a terminal indicates a change in the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell, "a change in the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell" can be understood as a change in the serving cell of the terminal. For example, some cells may be removed from the management range of the RAN node, or the number of cells managed by the RAN node may increase.

可选的,当网络节点为RAN节点时,若RAN节点收到核心网网元发送的更新后的RAN节点列表(可通过信元target gNB list承载该信息)时,即一些RAN节点管理的小区发生变化(例如,增加或删除小区等)。如果发生变化的小区是终端的邻区或备选邻区,可以理解为终端的服务小区或邻区的覆盖范围发生变化,此时RAN节点可以更新终端的测量目标(具体可参考前述对测量目标的介绍)。Optionally, when the network node is a RAN node, if the RAN node receives an updated RAN node list from the core network element (this information can be carried by the target gNB list cell), it means that some cells managed by the RAN node have changed (e.g., cells have been added or deleted). If the changed cell is a neighboring cell or a candidate neighboring cell of the terminal, it can be understood that the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell or neighboring cell has changed. In this case, the RAN node can update the terminal's measurement target (see the aforementioned introduction to measurement targets for details).

示例性的,当网络节点为RAN节点时,例如,若RAN节点接收到信元target gNB list指示该RAN节点或其他RAN节点管理的小区减少了,RAN节点会更新终端的测量信息,删除对应的测量目标。又例如,若RAN节点接收到target gNB list指示该RAN节点或其他RAN节点管理的小区增加了,RAN节点会更新终端的测量信息,可以增加对应的测量目标。当网络节点为终端时,终端在终端本地的上下文中更新测量目标对应的信息。可选的,终端将更新后的测量目标对应的信息指示给RAN节点。可选的,当网络节点为终端时,由于核心网网元与终端之间传输信息可以通过RAN节点进行转发,例如,RAN节点将来自核心网网元的终端状态信息通过下行信息传输(DLInformationTransfer)消息转发给对应的终端。For example, when the network node is a RAN node, if the RAN node receives a target gNB list indicating that the number of cells managed by the RAN node or another RAN node has decreased, the RAN node will update the terminal's measurement information and delete the corresponding measurement target. Conversely, if the RAN node receives a target gNB list indicating that the number of cells managed by the RAN node or another RAN node has increased, the RAN node will update the terminal's measurement information and may add the corresponding measurement target. When the network node is a terminal, the terminal updates the information corresponding to the measurement target in its local context. Optionally, the terminal indicates the updated information corresponding to the measurement target to the RAN node. Optionally, when the network node is a terminal, since information transmission between the core network elements and the terminal can be forwarded through the RAN node, for example, the RAN node forwards the terminal status information from the core network elements to the corresponding terminal via a downlink information transfer (DLInformationTransfer) message.

基于图4所示的方法,核心网网元可以通过感知终端的位置或运动速度发生变化,并通过终端状态信息将该变化指示给终端或RAN节点,使得终端或RAN节点可以根据终端位置或运动速度的变化确定终端位置,确定用于切换的测量参数。可以理解的,当网络节点为RAN节点时,由于RAN节点负责管理接入的多个终端的无线资源,所以RAN节点可以在根据多个终端的感知信息(包括终端的位置或运动速度发生变化的信息)确定用于终端进行小区切换的测量信息的基础上,更合理地对多个终端的无线资源进行调度和管理。当网络节点为终端时,终端可以根据终端状态信息自主调整测量信息,由于终端比RAN节点更清楚自身的运动状态(包括位置或速度的变化),如果核心网网元直接将终端状态信息指示给终端,由终端自主确定测量参数,相比于前述方法由RAN节点调整终端的测量参数,省去了RAN节点根据终端状态信息确定测量信息、以及发送第二信息的时间,这样做能够以更高的效率调整终端的测量参数,进而能确保更及时地切换,以及切换到合适的小区。综上所述,与目前由RAN节点配置终端测量参数、并由终端上报测量报告触发切换的方式相比,上述方法可以使终端或RAN节点根据终端位置对终端的移动性进行管理。避免了由于终端的移动造成测量参数可能配置得不合理的问题,从而能够更灵活地让终端进行切换,进而提高通信质量,满足用户需求。Based on the method shown in Figure 4, core network elements can sense changes in the terminal's position or speed and indicate these changes to the terminal or RAN node via terminal status information. This allows the terminal or RAN node to determine the terminal's position and the measurement parameters for handover based on the changes in position or speed. Understandably, when the network node is the RAN node, since it manages the radio resources of multiple connected terminals, it can more rationally schedule and manage the radio resources of multiple terminals based on the sensed information (including information about changes in the terminal's position or speed) to determine the measurement information for cell handover. When the network node is the terminal, the terminal can autonomously adjust its measurement information based on its status. Since the terminal is more aware of its own movement status (including changes in position or speed) than the RAN node, if the core network elements directly indicate the terminal's status information to the terminal, allowing the terminal to autonomously determine the measurement parameters, compared to the aforementioned method where the RAN node adjusts the terminal's measurement parameters, this saves the time the RAN node spends determining measurement information based on the terminal's status and sending secondary information. This allows for more efficient adjustment of the terminal's measurement parameters, ensuring more timely handover and switching to a suitable cell. In summary, compared to the current method where RAN nodes configure terminal measurement parameters and the terminal reports measurement data to trigger handover, the above method allows the terminal or RAN node to manage terminal mobility based on the terminal's location. This avoids the problem of potentially inappropriate measurement parameter configuration due to terminal movement, thus enabling more flexible terminal handover, improving communication quality, and meeting user needs.

在图4所示的方法中,感知终端位置或运动速度的变化的设备是核心网网元。在具体应用中,感知用于终端进行小区切换的变化的也可以是RAN节点。例如,RAN节点(可以是图2所示通信系统20的RAN节点202)可以采用与图4中核心网网元类似的方式感知终端位置或运动速度的变化,并根据该变化确定用于终端进行小区切换的测量信息。RAN节点根据终端位置或运动速度的变化确定用于终端进行小区切换的测量信息的过程与S403类似,可以参考S403中对应的描述。可以理解的,RAN节点确定测量信息之后,还可以向终端发送第二信息,以便终端根据第二信息进行测量。或者,RAN节点可以采用与图4中核心网网元类似的方式感知终端位置或运动速度的变化,并向终端指示该变化,以便终端根据该变化确定用于小区切换的测量信息,并根据该测量信息进行测量。In the method shown in Figure 4, the device sensing changes in the terminal's position or speed is a core network element. In specific applications, the RAN node can also sense changes used for cell handover. For example, the RAN node (which could be RAN node 202 in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2) can sense changes in the terminal's position or speed in a manner similar to that of the core network element in Figure 4, and determine measurement information for cell handover based on these changes. The process by which the RAN node determines the measurement information for cell handover based on changes in the terminal's position or speed is similar to S403, and can be found in the corresponding description in S403. It is understood that after determining the measurement information, the RAN node can also send second information to the terminal so that the terminal can perform measurements based on the second information. Alternatively, the RAN node can sense changes in the terminal's position or speed in a manner similar to that of the core network element in Figure 4, and indicate these changes to the terminal so that the terminal can determine the measurement information for cell handover based on these changes and perform measurements based on this information.

如图5所示,为本申请提供的一种通信方法,该通信方法可以包括如下步骤:As shown in Figure 5, a communication method provided in this application may include the following steps:

S501:第一RAN节点向核心网网元发送小区切换信息。相应的,核心网网元接收来自第一RAN节点的小区切换信息。S501: The first RAN node sends cell handover information to the core network element. Correspondingly, the core network element receives the cell handover information from the first RAN node.

本申请中,核心网网元可以是图2所示通信系统20中的核心网204中的SF网元等网元,不作限制。第一RAN节点可以是图2所示通信系统20中的任意一个RAN节点,如RAN节点202a或RAN节点202b。In this application, the core network element can be any network element such as the SF network element in the core network 204 of the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2, without limitation. The first RAN node can be any RAN node in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2, such as RAN node 202a or RAN node 202b.

其中,上述小区切换信息包括将终端切换至第一小区的条件信息。应理解该条件信息可以是与切换相关的测量配置的信息,该测量配置包括对测量目标进行测量的具体参数。其中,测量目标或测量配置的介绍可以参考前文对应的说明,不再赘述。本申请中,终端可以是图2所示的通信系统20中与RAN节点202通信的终端203。The aforementioned cell handover information includes conditional information for handing over the terminal to the first cell. It should be understood that this conditional information may be information related to the handover measurement configuration, which includes specific parameters for measuring the target. The description of the measurement target or measurement configuration can be found in the preceding description and will not be repeated here. In this application, the terminal may be terminal 203 communicating with RAN node 202 in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2.

S502:核心网网元确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量。S502: Core network elements determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell.

一种可能的实现方式,核心网网元可以确定终端的位置,并根据终端的位置和第一小区的覆盖信息确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量。可选的,上述过程可以是核心网网元实时执行的。One possible implementation is that the core network element can determine the location of the terminal and, based on the terminal's location and the coverage information of the first cell, determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell. Optionally, the above process can be executed in real time by the core network element.

可选的,终端的位置为终端与第一RAN节点和/或第二RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置。例如,终端位于第一RAN节点和第二RAN节点管理的小区的重叠区域。或者,终端位于第一RAN节点管理的小区的中心区域。或者,终端位于第二RAN节点管理的小区的边缘区域。Optionally, the terminal's location is its relative position to the cells managed by the first RAN node and/or the second RAN node. For example, the terminal may be located in the overlapping area of the cells managed by the first RAN node and the second RAN node. Alternatively, the terminal may be located in the central area of the cell managed by the first RAN node. Or, the terminal may be located in the edge area of the cell managed by the second RAN node.

其中,第二RAN节点可以是图2所示通信系统20中与第一RAN节点不同的RAN节点。例如,如果第一RAN节点为RAN节点202a,则第二RAN节点为RAN节点202b,如果第一RAN节点为RAN节点202b,则第二RAN节点为RAN节点202a。The second RAN node can be a different RAN node from the first RAN node in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2. For example, if the first RAN node is RAN node 202a, then the second RAN node is RAN node 202b; if the first RAN node is RAN node 202b, then the second RAN node is RAN node 202a.

可以理解的,核心网网元可以多次获取终端的感知信息(例如,终端的位置或速度等信息),对比更新后的终端的感知信息是否与已知的终端的感知信息不同,以确定终端的位置或运动速度是否发生变化。根据该变化,核心网网元可以确定终端的位置,根据终端的位置和第一小区的覆盖信息确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量。Understandably, core network elements can acquire terminal sensing information (e.g., terminal location or speed) multiple times, compare the updated terminal sensing information with known terminal sensing information to determine if the terminal's location or speed has changed. Based on this change, core network elements can determine the terminal's location and, based on the terminal's location and the coverage information of the first cell, determine the terminal's signal quality for the first cell.

示例性的,核心网网元可以利用感知地图获取终端针对第一小区的信号质量,换言之,感知地图可以用于确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量。例如,核心网网元利用感知地图获取终端的位置和第一小区的覆盖信息,根据终端的位置和第一小区的覆盖信息确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量。For example, core network elements can use a perception map to obtain the signal quality of a terminal for a first cell. In other words, the perception map can be used to determine the signal quality of a terminal for a first cell. For instance, core network elements use the perception map to obtain the location of the terminal and the coverage information of the first cell, and determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell based on the location of the terminal and the coverage information of the first cell.

一种可能的实现方式,核心网网元可以根据终端的位置和第一小区的覆盖信息确定终端的信号质量。示例性的,核心网网元可以根据终端的位置和第一小区的覆盖信息,确定终端与管理第一小区的第二RAN节点之间的信号传输路径,并根据该传输路径确定出终端的信号质量。可选的,感知地图还可以包括终端附近的环境信息,例如,楼宇、桥梁等建筑物的位置和高度。由于这些建筑物可能对终端和第二RAN节点之间信号的视距传输造成遮挡,那么根据建筑物或其他遮挡物的信息(例如,遮挡物的规模信息),可以确定出第二RAN节点和终端传输的信号的传输路径(该路径可能包括直射径或反射径等),进而确定出路径损耗和终端的接收功率(该接收功率可以理解为终端针对第一小区的信号质量)。可选的,感知地图中各个物体(例如,终端、障碍物或者RAN节点等网络设备等)的位置可以用经纬度坐标来确定。One possible implementation is that the core network element can determine the terminal's signal quality based on the terminal's location and the coverage information of the first cell. For example, the core network element can determine the signal transmission path between the terminal and the second RAN node managing the first cell based on the terminal's location and the coverage information of the first cell, and determine the terminal's signal quality based on this transmission path. Optionally, the perception map can also include environmental information near the terminal, such as the location and height of buildings, bridges, and other structures. Since these buildings may obstruct line-of-sight signal transmission between the terminal and the second RAN node, the transmission path of the signal transmitted between the second RAN node and the terminal (which may include direct or reflected paths) can be determined based on information about buildings or other obstructions (e.g., the size of the obstruction), thereby determining the path loss and the terminal's received power (which can be understood as the terminal's signal quality for the first cell). Optionally, the locations of various objects in the perception map (e.g., terminals, obstacles, or network devices such as RAN nodes) can be determined using latitude and longitude coordinates.

可选的,在获取终端位置的基础上,核心网网元还可以根据第一RAN节点的天线的具体位置和高度,以及该终端附近的环境确定出第一RAN节点与终端之间的传输路径,再结合第一RAN节点发送信号的功率和路径损耗,进而确定出终端接收第一小区的信号的接收功率,也就是终端针对第一小区的信号质量。Optionally, based on obtaining the terminal location, the core network element can also determine the transmission path between the first RAN node and the terminal according to the specific location and height of the antenna of the first RAN node and the environment near the terminal. Then, combined with the power of the signal transmitted by the first RAN node and the path loss, the receiving power of the terminal receiving the signal of the first cell can be determined, that is, the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell.

一种可能的实现方式,核心网网元可以构建感知地图。具体的,核心网网元可以根据第二信息和/或第三信息构建感知地图,核心网网元获取第二信息或第三信息的方法如下:One possible implementation is that core network elements can construct a perception map. Specifically, core network elements can construct a perception map based on second and/or third information. The methods by which core network elements obtain the second or third information are as follows:

第一RAN节点向核心网网元发送第三信息。相应的,核心网网元接收来自第一RAN节点的第三信息。该第三信息用于指示第一RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息。例如,第三信息可以指示第一RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息。该覆盖信息可以指示第一RAN节点管理的小区的中心位置,以及该小区的半径。可选的,该覆盖信息还可以指示第一RAN节点管理的小区覆盖区域的形状(例如,圆形或扇形等形状)或者其他类型的信息,不做限定。示例性的,第三信息可以包括第一RAN节点管理的至少一个小区的覆盖信息,例如,第一RAN节点管理的小区包括小区A,小区A的覆盖信息可以包括:小区A中心的经纬度坐标,小区A为圆形的指示信息,以及小区A半径长为1000米的指示信息。The first RAN node sends third information to the core network element. Correspondingly, the core network element receives the third information from the first RAN node. This third information is used to indicate the coverage information of the cells managed by the first RAN node. For example, the third information may indicate the coverage information of the cells managed by the first RAN node. This coverage information may indicate the center location of the cells managed by the first RAN node, and the radius of the cells. Optionally, the coverage information may also indicate the shape of the coverage area of the cells managed by the first RAN node (e.g., a circular or fan-shaped shape) or other types of information, without limitation. For example, the third information may include the coverage information of at least one cell managed by the first RAN node. For instance, the cells managed by the first RAN node include cell A, and the coverage information of cell A may include: the latitude and longitude coordinates of the center of cell A, indication that cell A is circular, and indication that the radius of cell A is 1000 meters.

第二RAN节点向核心网网元发送第二信息。相应的,核心网网元接收来自第二RAN节点的第二信息。该第二信息用于指示第二RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息,第二RAN节点管理的小区包括第一小区。例如,第二信息可以指示第二RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息,该覆盖信息可以指示第二RAN节点管理的小区的中心位置,以及该小区的半径。可选的,该覆盖信息还可以指示第二RAN节点管理的小区覆盖区域的形状(例如,圆形或扇形等形状)或者其他类型的信息,不做限定。The second RAN node sends second information to the core network elements. Correspondingly, the core network elements receive the second information from the second RAN node. This second information is used to indicate the coverage information of the cells managed by the second RAN node, including the first cell. For example, the second information may indicate the coverage information of the cells managed by the second RAN node, which may indicate the center location and radius of the cells. Optionally, the coverage information may also indicate the shape of the coverage area of the cells managed by the second RAN node (e.g., a circular or fan-shaped shape) or other types of information, without limitation.

示例性的,第二信息可以包括第二RAN节点管理的至少一个小区的覆盖信息,例如,第二RAN节点管理的小区包括小区B,小区B的覆盖信息可以包括:小区B中心的经纬度坐标,小区B为扇形的指示信息,以及小区B半径长为2000米的指示信息。For example, the second information may include coverage information of at least one cell managed by the second RAN node. For instance, the cell managed by the second RAN node includes cell B, and the coverage information of cell B may include: the latitude and longitude coordinates of the center of cell B, indication that cell B is fan-shaped, and indication that cell B has a radius of 2000 meters.

可以理解的,为了完善感知地图,核心网网元还可以获取除第一RAN节点和第二RAN节点之外的RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息,核心网网元还可以获取任意RAN节点和/或任意终端对上述终端的感知结果。其中,任意RAN节点对终端的感知结果可以是该RAN节点通过自发自收,或他发自收的方式感知到的。任意终端对上述终端的感知结果可以是任意终端通过自发自收,或他发自收的方式感知到的,或者是通过传感器感知到的。Understandably, to improve the perception map, core network elements can also acquire coverage information of cells managed by RAN nodes other than the first and second RAN nodes. Core network elements can also acquire the perception results of any RAN node and/or any terminal regarding the aforementioned terminals. Specifically, the perception result of any RAN node regarding a terminal can be obtained by the RAN node through self-transmission and self-reception, or by a third party transmitting and receiving data. Similarly, the perception result of any terminal regarding the aforementioned terminals can be obtained by the terminal through self-transmission and self-reception, or by a third party transmitting and receiving data, or through sensor perception.

S503:核心网网元向第一RAN节点发送第一信息。相应的,第一RAN节点接收来自核心网网元的第一信息。S503: The core network element sends the first information to the first RAN node. Correspondingly, the first RAN node receives the first information from the core network element.

一种可能的设计,第一信息是由核心网网元根据小区切换信息和终端针对第一小区的信号质量确定的,第一信息用于终端进行小区切换。One possible design is that the first information is determined by the core network element based on cell handover information and the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell, and the first information is used by the terminal for cell handover.

其中,第一信息包括以下至少一项:第一指示信息,终端针对第一小区的信号质量或测量事件的信息。该测量事件可以是前述表1中所说的A1~A5测量事件或B1~B2测量事件。上述第一指示信息指示将终端切换至第一小区。The first information includes at least one of the following: first indication information, which is information about the signal quality or measurement events of the terminal for the first cell. The measurement events can be measurement events A1 to A5 or measurement events B1 to B2 as described in Table 1 above. The aforementioned first indication information indicates that the terminal should be switched to the first cell.

可以理解的,当终端针对第一小区的信号质量满足测量事件上报的条件时,第一信息包括测量事件的信息,以使第一RAN节点获取此时终端满足的测量事件,第一RAN节点可能会基于此测量事件向终端发送消息,例如当终端上报A3时,第一RAN节点可能会向终端发送包括切换指令的消息。示例性的,核心网网元可以根据终端与第一小区的相对位置确定是否满足测量事件对应的门限,当满足该门限时,确定第一信息包括测量事件。Understandably, when a terminal meets the conditions for reporting a measurement event regarding the signal quality of the first cell, the first information includes information about the measurement event, enabling the first RAN node to obtain the measurement event that the terminal meets at this time. The first RAN node may send a message to the terminal based on this measurement event. For example, when the terminal reports A3, the first RAN node may send a message including a handover instruction to the terminal. For instance, core network elements can determine whether a threshold corresponding to the measurement event is met based on the relative position of the terminal and the first cell. When the threshold is met, it is determined that the first information includes the measurement event.

可以理解的,当终端测量到终端针对第一小区的信号质量、或者该信号质量与上次终端发送的第一信息所包括相同小区的信号质量不同时,第一信息包括终端针对第一小区的信号质量,以使第一RAN节点获取此时终端针对第一小区的信号质量,第一RAN节点可以基于信号质量进行网络优化等。Understandably, when the terminal measures the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell, or when the signal quality is different from the signal quality of the same cell included in the first information sent by the terminal last time, the first information includes the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell, so that the first RAN node can obtain the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell at this time, and the first RAN node can perform network optimization, etc. based on the signal quality.

可以理解的,当终端针对第一小区的信号质量满足切换条件时,第一信息包括第一指示信息,以指示将终端切换至第一小区。核心网网元可以根据终端针对第一小区的信号质量,确定终端与小区的相对位置,进而确定终端是否进行小区切换。Understandably, when the signal quality of the terminal relative to the first cell meets the handover conditions, the first information includes first indication information to indicate that the terminal should be handed over to the first cell. The core network element can determine the relative position of the terminal and the cell based on the signal quality of the terminal relative to the first cell, and thus determine whether the terminal should perform a cell handover.

可以理解的,通常情况下,终端处于小区不同的范围会有不同的信号质量。示例性的,以RSRP衡量信号质量为例,例如,当终端位于小区中心时,RSRP大于-80dBm;当终端处于介于小区中心到小区边缘的区域内时,RSRP的取值范围可以是[-100dBm,-80dBm];当终端位于小区边缘时,RSRP可以是小于-100dBm。对于信号质量的取值范围不限于上述示例,也可以根据实际的小区覆盖情况进行调整,本申请不做限定。在确定终端与小区的相对位置后,核心网网元可以根据该相对位置和小区切换信息确定第一信息。示例性的,当确定出终端位于小区边缘时,根据终端的位置和运动方向确定出该终端的目标小区(例如,第一小区),然后使第一信息包括切换命令(例如,第一指示信息,指示终端切换到第一小区)。Understandably, a terminal will typically experience different signal quality depending on its location within a cell. For example, using RSRP (Resonance Ratio) to measure signal quality, when the terminal is located in the cell center, the RSRP is greater than -80dBm; when the terminal is located in the area between the cell center and the cell edge, the RSRP value can range from -100dBm to -80dBm; and when the terminal is located at the cell edge, the RSRP can be less than -100dBm. The range of signal quality values is not limited to the above examples and can be adjusted according to the actual cell coverage; this application does not impose any limitations on this. After determining the relative position of the terminal and the cell, the core network element can determine first information based on this relative position and cell handover information. For example, when it is determined that the terminal is located at the cell edge, the target cell (e.g., the first cell) of the terminal is determined based on the terminal's position and direction of movement, and then the first information includes a handover command (e.g., first indication information, instructing the terminal to hand over to the first cell).

可选的,在接收到第一信息之后,第一RAN节点根据第一信息确定是否将终端切换至第一小区。示例性的,第一信息包括第一指示信息时,第一RAN节点可以指示终端切换,例如,第一RAN节点向终端发送重配置消息,该消息包括让终端切换到第一小区的命令。当第一信息包括测量事件的信息时,第一RAN节点可以根据测量事件的信息对终端进行测量配置的更新或者确定该终端是否进行小区切换。例如,当测量事件的信息包括A2测量报告、或者终端针对第一小区的信号质量变差时,第一RAN节点可以为终端配置A3测量事件,以便获取终端针对邻区的信号质量。当第一信息包括终端针对第一小区的信号质量时,如果该信号质量低于门限阈值,可以确定终端切换。如果该信号质量较好(例如,RSRP≥-80dBm)第一RAN节点可以将该终端针对第一小区的信号质量记录下来,这些数据可以用来做网络优化。Optionally, after receiving the first information, the first RAN node determines whether to hand over the terminal to the first cell based on the first information. For example, when the first information includes first indication information, the first RAN node can instruct the terminal to hand over; for instance, the first RAN node sends a reconfiguration message to the terminal, which includes a command to hand over the terminal to the first cell. When the first information includes measurement event information, the first RAN node can update the terminal's measurement configuration or determine whether the terminal should hand over the cell based on the measurement event information. For example, when the measurement event information includes an A2 measurement report or a deterioration in the terminal's signal quality relative to the first cell, the first RAN node can configure an A3 measurement event for the terminal to obtain the terminal's signal quality relative to neighboring cells. When the first information includes the terminal's signal quality relative to the first cell, if the signal quality is below a threshold, a terminal handover can be determined. If the signal quality is good (e.g., RSRP ≥ -80dBm), the first RAN node can record the terminal's signal quality relative to the first cell, and this data can be used for network optimization.

基于图5所示的方法,核心网网元能够根据终端的位置确定出终端针对第一小区的信号质量,再结合小区切换信息,能够确定是否让终端进行小区切换。因此,该方法实现了核心网网元灵活地对终端的移动性的管理,终端可以更灵活地进行切换,进而提高通信质量,满足用户需求。Based on the method shown in Figure 5, the core network element can determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell according to the terminal's location. Combined with cell handover information, it can then determine whether the terminal should perform a cell handover. Therefore, this method enables the core network element to flexibly manage terminal mobility, allowing the terminal to handover more flexibly, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs.

如图6所示,为本申请提供的一种通信方法,该通信方法可以包括如下步骤:As shown in Figure 6, a communication method provided in this application may include the following steps:

S601:第二RAN节点向第一RAN节点发送第一信息。相应的,第一RAN节点接收来自第二RAN节点的第一信息。S601: The second RAN node sends the first information to the first RAN node. Correspondingly, the first RAN node receives the first information from the second RAN node.

本申请中,第一RAN节点和第二RAN节点可以是图2所示通信系统20中的不同RAN节点。例如,如果第一RAN节点为RAN节点202a,则第二RAN节点为RAN节点202b,如果第一RAN节点为RAN节点202b,则第二RAN节点为RAN节点202a。In this application, the first RAN node and the second RAN node can be different RAN nodes in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2. For example, if the first RAN node is RAN node 202a, then the second RAN node is RAN node 202b, and if the first RAN node is RAN node 202b, then the second RAN node is RAN node 202a.

上述第一信息指示以下至少一项:第一小区的第一波束或终端针对第一RAN节点的定时提前量(timing advance,TA)。其中,第一RAN节点管理的小区包括第一小区,第一小区为终端切换的目标小区,第一波束用于终端切换至第一小区后与第一小区通信,定时提前量用于终端切换至第一小区后进行上行同步。其中,终端可以是图2所示的通信系统20中与RAN节点202通信的终端203。The aforementioned first information indicates at least one of the following: the first beam of the first cell or the timing advance (TA) of the terminal to the first RAN node. The cells managed by the first RAN node include the first cell, which is the target cell for terminal handover. The first beam is used for communication between the terminal and the first cell after handover, and the timing advance is used for uplink synchronization after handover. The terminal can be terminal 203 communicating with RAN node 202 in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2.

本方法将以终端进行站间切换为例来进行说明,其中,终端切换的目标小区所属的目标RAN节点是第一RAN节点,终端切换的源小区所属的RAN节点是第二RAN节点。This method will be illustrated using the example of inter-site handover of a terminal. The target RAN node of the target cell to which the terminal is handover belongs is the first RAN node, and the RAN node of the source cell to which the terminal is handover belongs is the second RAN node.

可选的,第一信息是根据第二信息确定的,第二信息包括以下至少一项:终端对第一小区的测量结果、终端的位置信息或终端的运动速度。应理解,第二RAN节点可以根据第二信息确定终端的位置,再根据终端的位置确定第一波束和/或上述定时提前量。具体的,第二RAN节点可以根据下面两种可能的设计分别确定第一波束和上述定时提前量。Optionally, the first information is determined based on the second information, which includes at least one of the following: the terminal's measurement results of the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's movement speed. It should be understood that the second RAN node can determine the terminal's location based on the second information, and then determine the first beam and/or the aforementioned timing advance based on the terminal's location. Specifically, the second RAN node can determine the first beam and the aforementioned timing advance according to the following two possible designs.

一种可能的设计,第一波束的数量为多个,多个第一波束中任意一个第一波束与第一小区中的一个参考点对应。其中,参考点可以是指时间点或位置。其中,第一波束可以是第一RAN节点使用的用来和终端通信的接收波束。One possible design involves multiple first beams, with any one of these first beams corresponding to a reference point in the first cell. The reference point can refer to a point in time or a location. The first beam can be a receive beam used by the first RAN node for communication with the terminal.

可以理解的,第二RAN节点获取感知信息,感知信息包括终端的位置信息,或者感知信息包括终端的位置信息和终端的运动速度。第二RAN节点可以接收来自终端的测量结果,该测量结果可以作为感知信息;或者第二RAN节点可以对终端进行感知,例如通过自发自收的方式进行感知,进而获取感知信息;或者,第二RAN节点可以接收来自核心网网元的感知信息,本申请不限定获取感知信息的方式。根据S401的方法,第二RAN节点可以通过终端的位置信息或运动速度确定出终端的位置,由于第一RAN节点的位置也是可以获取的,根据第一RAN节点和终端的位置能够确定出,终端在切换至第一RAN节点管理的第一小区后,第一RAN节点所使用的接收波束信息,包括接收波束的方向等信息。应理解,对于移动的终端,第一RAN节点在不同时刻使用的接收波束可能是不同的,因此,终端处于不同的时间点或不同的位置时,第一RAN节点可以使用相应的第一波束与终端通信,从而实现了对终端切换至第一小区后对第一波束的预测,终端和第一RAN节点之间不进行波束对齐就能确定合适的波束,降低了切换的时延。可选的,第二RAN节点可以实时地预测终端的位置,进而在终端切换到至第一小区之前的一段时间内,实时地向第一RAN节点指示第一RAN节点会用到的第一波束。Understandably, the second RAN node acquires sensing information, which includes the terminal's location information, or the sensing information includes both the terminal's location information and its movement speed. The second RAN node can receive measurement results from the terminal, which can be used as sensing information; or the second RAN node can sense the terminal, for example, through a self-transmitting and self-receiving method, and thus acquire sensing information; or the second RAN node can receive sensing information from core network elements. This application does not limit the method of acquiring sensing information. According to the method in S401, the second RAN node can determine the terminal's location through the terminal's location information or movement speed. Since the location of the first RAN node is also obtainable, based on the locations of the first RAN node and the terminal, the receiving beam information used by the first RAN node after the terminal switches to the first cell managed by the first RAN node, including the direction of the receiving beam, can be determined. It should be understood that for a mobile terminal, the receiving beam used by the first RAN node may be different at different times. Therefore, when the terminal is at different times or locations, the first RAN node can use the corresponding first beam to communicate with the terminal, thereby enabling the prediction of the first beam after the terminal hands over to the first cell. The appropriate beam can be determined without beam alignment between the terminal and the first RAN node, reducing handover latency. Optionally, the second RAN node can predict the terminal's location in real time, and then, for a period of time before the terminal hands over to the first cell, indicate to the first RAN node in real time the first beam that the first RAN node will use.

一种可能的设计,上述定时提前量的数量为多个,多个定时提前量中任意一个定时提前量与第一小区的一个参考点对应。One possible design is that there are multiple timing advances, and any one of these timing advances corresponds to a reference point of the first cell.

其中,定时提前量可以用于终端与RAN节点进行上行同步,由于第一小区是第一RAN节点管理的小区,因此终端切换至第一小区时,终端与第一RAN节点进行上行同步。应理解,在同一个系统帧内,RAN节点预期来自不同终端的信号到达RAN节点接收端的时间是对齐的。由于不同的终端距离RAN节点的远近不同,因此不同终端将信号发送到RAN节点所需的时间不同,因此上述不同终端的信号到达RAN节点接收端的时间是否对齐可能受终端与RAN节点的距离影响。若不同终端发送的信息在不同的时刻到达RAN节点,即不同终端的时间没有经过校准,那么不同终端的信号互相之间会造成干扰。例如,在同一个系统帧之内,终端A的信号A预计在子帧1的时间点上被RAN节点接收,终端B的信号B预计在子帧2的时间点上被RAN节点接收。但是若信号A所用的发送时间过长,信号A在子帧2的时间点上才被RAN节点接收,就会对RAN节点接收信号B产生影响,所以例如,距离RAN节点远的终端,设置较大的定时提前量,使终端发送上行数据的系统帧相比对应的下行帧提前一定的时间。The timing advance can be used for uplink synchronization between the terminal and the RAN node. Since the first cell is managed by the first RAN node, the terminal performs uplink synchronization with the first RAN node when handing over to the first cell. It should be understood that within the same system frame, the RAN node expects signals from different terminals to arrive at the RAN node receiver at aligned times. Because different terminals are at different distances from the RAN node, the time required for each terminal to send signals to the RAN node varies. Therefore, the alignment of the arrival times of signals from different terminals at the RAN node receiver may be affected by the distance between the terminal and the RAN node. If information sent by different terminals arrives at the RAN node at different times, i.e., the times of different terminals are not calibrated, the signals from different terminals will interfere with each other. For example, within the same system frame, terminal A's signal A is expected to be received by the RAN node at time point 1 of subframe, and terminal B's signal B is expected to be received by the RAN node at time point 2 of subframe. However, if the transmission time of signal A is too long, and signal A is only received by the RAN node at the time point of subframe 2, it will affect the RAN node's reception of signal B. Therefore, for example, for terminals far from the RAN node, a larger timing advance is set so that the system frame for sending uplink data is a certain time ahead of the corresponding downlink frame.

可以理解的,对于移动的终端,不同时刻的终端可能处于不同的位置,可以用多个定时提前量对应不同的参考点,指示不同时刻(或不同位置)的终端会用到的定时提前量。可选的,第二RAN节点可以实时地预测终端的位置,进而在终端切换到至第一小区之前的一段时间内,实时地向第一RAN节点指示终端会用到的定时提前量。Understandably, for a mobile terminal, the terminal may be in different locations at different times. Multiple timing advances can be used to correspond to different reference points, indicating the timing advance that the terminal will use at different times (or different locations). Optionally, the second RAN node can predict the terminal's location in real time, and then, for a period of time before the terminal hands over to the first cell, indicate the timing advance that the terminal will use to the first RAN node in real time.

一种可能的实现方式,第二RAN节点可以根据下述方法1或方法2确定第一波束或定时提前量。One possible implementation is that the second RAN node can determine the first beam or timing advance according to method 1 or method 2 below.

方法1:第二RAN节点确定终端的感知信息(例如,终端的位置或速度等信息),利用该感知信息确定第一波束或定时提前量。Method 1: The second RAN node determines the terminal's sensing information (e.g., the terminal's position or speed), and uses this sensing information to determine the first beam or timing advance.

可选的,第二RAN节点可以构建感知地图。第二RAN节点构建感知地图的方式与图4所示方法或图5所示方法中核心网网元构建感知地图的方式类似,不再赘述。该感知地图用于确定终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项,由此可以更方便地获取终端切换至第一小区后,可能移动到的位置。利用感知地图,可以将上述终端位置或速度的变化表示出来,该地图还包括其他地理信息(例如,终端周围环境的遮挡物的位置或高度等信息)。可选的,感知地图可以获取终端的实时位置。第二RAN节点可以根据感知地图预测终端切换至第一小区后的多个位置,进而确定每个位置对应的第一波束的信息。例如,该第一波束的信息包括第二RAN节点接收波束的方向,可以通过到达方向(direction of arrival,DOA)等参数表示该方向的具体角度。因此,在终端切换至第一小区后,第一RAN节点就可以通过第一波束与终端进行通信。Optionally, the second RAN node can construct a perception map. The method by which the second RAN node constructs the perception map is similar to the method shown in Figure 4 or Figure 5, and will not be repeated here. This perception map is used to determine at least one of the terminal's location or its speed, thereby facilitating the acquisition of the possible location the terminal might move to after switching to the first cell. Using the perception map, the changes in the terminal's location or speed can be represented. The map also includes other geographical information (e.g., the location or height of obstructions in the terminal's surrounding environment). Optionally, the perception map can acquire the terminal's real-time location. The second RAN node can predict multiple locations of the terminal after switching to the first cell based on the perception map, and then determine the information of the first beam corresponding to each location. For example, the information of the first beam includes the direction in which the second RAN node receives the beam, which can be represented by parameters such as the direction of arrival (DOA). Therefore, after the terminal switches to the first cell, the first RAN node can communicate with the terminal through the first beam.

可选的,第二RAN节点可以从核心网网元获取终端的感知信息(例如,终端的位置或速度等信息),利用该感知信息确定第一波束或定时提前量。Optionally, the second RAN node can obtain the terminal's sensing information (e.g., the terminal's location or speed) from the core network elements and use this sensing information to determine the first beam or timing advance.

同样的,第二RAN节点可以利用与上述过程类似的方法预测终端在终端切换至第一小区后,可能移动到的位置信息,根据预测的位置信息确定终端在不同位置对应的定时提前量,该定时提前量用于终端与第一RAN节点进行上行同步。Similarly, the second RAN node can use a method similar to the above process to predict the location information that the terminal may move to after the terminal switches to the first cell, and determine the timing advance of the terminal at different locations based on the predicted location information. This timing advance is used for the terminal to perform uplink synchronization with the first RAN node.

其中,终端的位置为终端与第一RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置。The terminal's location refers to its relative position to the cell managed by the first RAN node.

方法2:第二RAN节点可以从外部获取确定后的第一波束或上述定时提前量。Method 2: The second RAN node can obtain the determined first beam or the aforementioned timing advance from an external source.

可选的,第二RAN节点接收来自核心网网元的第四信息,第四信息指示以下至少一项:第一波束或定时提前量。Optionally, the second RAN node receives fourth information from the core network element, the fourth information indicating at least one of the following: a first beam or timing advance.

其中,核心网网元可以是图2所示通信系统20中的核心网204的SF网元。Among them, the core network element can be the SF network element of the core network 204 in the communication system 20 shown in Figure 2.

可以理解的,由核心网网元根据感知信息确定出第一波束或定时提前量。可选的,核心网网元也可以利用感知地图确定出第一波束或定时提前量,具体过程可以参考方法1,不再赘述。Understandably, the core network elements determine the first beam or timing advance based on sensing information. Optionally, the core network elements can also determine the first beam or timing advance using the sensing map; the specific process can be found in Method 1, and will not be elaborated further.

可选的,第一信息承载于切换请求消息中。该切换请求可以参考S103的说明。Optionally, the first information is carried in the handover request message. This handover request can be referred to in the description of S103.

示例性的,第二RAN节点可以通过第一信息向第一RAN节点指示第一波束,便于第一RAN节点在终端切换至第一小区后使用第一波束接收终端的信号。或者,第二RAN节点也可以通过第一信息向第一RAN节点指示多个定时提前量,由第一RAN节点根据无线资源调度情况从多个定时提前量中进行选择,例如,从多个定时提前量中选择一个合适的定时提前量。For example, the second RAN node can indicate a first beam to the first RAN node via the first information, so that the first RAN node can use the first beam to receive the terminal's signal after the terminal switches to the first cell. Alternatively, the second RAN node can also indicate multiple timing advances to the first RAN node via the first information, and the first RAN node can select from the multiple timing advances according to the radio resource scheduling situation, for example, selecting a suitable timing advance from the multiple timing advances.

可选的,第二RAN节点向第一RAN节点发送第三信息。相应的,第二RAN节点接收来自第一RAN节点的第三信息,第三信息指示第一定时提前量,多个定时提前量包括第一定时提前量。其中,第三信息可以是切换请求确认消息(参考S104的说明)。通过上述方法,第一RAN节点可以结合RAN节点侧无线资源调度情况,确定出终端切换至第一小区后使用的定时提前量,该定时提前量更具有可靠性。Optionally, the second RAN node sends third information to the first RAN node. Correspondingly, the second RAN node receives the third information from the first RAN node, which indicates a first timing advance, and multiple timing advances include the first timing advance. The third information may be a handover request confirmation message (refer to the description in S104). Through this method, the first RAN node can determine the timing advance used by the terminal after handover to the first cell, based on the radio resource scheduling situation on the RAN node side; this timing advance is more reliable.

可以理解的,当第一信息包括多个定时提前量时,第一RAN节点可以根据RAN节点侧无线资源调度信息,从多个定时提前量中确定出第一定时提前量,并将确认后的第一定时提前量包括在第三消息中,发送给第二RAN节点。第二RAN节点接收到第三信息,可以将第一RAN节点确认的第一定时提前量指示给终端。例如,该第一定时提前量的信息可以被包括在RRC重配置消息(包含切换至第一小区的消息)中,由第二RAN节点发送给终端,终端可以在切换时使用该第一定时提前量进行上行同步。Understandably, when the first information includes multiple timing advances, the first RAN node can determine the first timing advance from these multiple timing advances based on the RAN node's radio resource scheduling information, and include the confirmed first timing advance in the third message, sending it to the second RAN node. Upon receiving the third information, the second RAN node can indicate the first timing advance confirmed by the first RAN node to the terminal. For example, this first timing advance information can be included in an RRC reconfiguration message (containing a message about handover to the first cell), sent by the second RAN node to the terminal, which can then use this first timing advance for uplink synchronization during handover.

S602:在终端切换至第一小区后,第一RAN节点根据第一信息与终端通信。S602: After the terminal switches to the first cell, the first RAN node communicates with the terminal based on the first information.

可以理解的,终端切换至第一小区后,第一RAN节点可以使用第一信息指示的第一波束接收终端的信号。终端可以根据第一定时提前量信息与第一RAN节点进行的上行同步。Understandably, after the terminal switches to the first cell, the first RAN node can use the first beam indicated by the first information to receive the terminal's signal. The terminal can perform uplink synchronization with the first RAN node based on the first timing advance information.

基于图6所示的方法,第二RAN节点能够根据感知信息确定终端的位置,进而能够确定出终端切换到第一RAN节点管理的第一小区会用到的定时提前量信息。获取该定时提前量信息后,终端能够快速实现与第一RAN节点的上行同步,进而快速地切换到第一小区,从而大大降低终端切换的时延。第一RAN节点也可以使用第一信息指示的第一波束作为接收波束,与目前确定接收波束的流程(通常终端用多个波束发送信号,由RAN节点选择接收信号质量最高的波束作为后续的接收波束)相比,也会大大降低时延。因此,通过上述方法能够有效降低切换时延,能够降低更灵活地让终端进行切换,进而提高通信质量,满足用户需求。Based on the method shown in Figure 6, the second RAN node can determine the terminal's location based on the sensing information, and thus determine the timing advance information needed for the terminal to switch to the first cell managed by the first RAN node. After obtaining this timing advance information, the terminal can quickly achieve uplink synchronization with the first RAN node, and then quickly switch to the first cell, thereby greatly reducing the terminal handover latency. The first RAN node can also use the first beam indicated by the first information as the receiving beam, which will also greatly reduce latency compared to the current process of determining the receiving beam (usually the terminal sends signals with multiple beams, and the RAN node selects the beam with the highest received signal quality as the subsequent receiving beam). Therefore, the above method can effectively reduce handover latency, enable terminals to handover more flexibly, thereby improving communication quality and meeting user needs.

可以理解的,上述步骤中的终端或者RAN节点或者核心网网元的动作可以由图3所示的通信装置30中的处理器301调用存储303中存储的应用程序代码来执行,本申请对此不做任何限制。It is understood that the actions of the terminal, RAN node, or core network element in the above steps can be executed by the processor 301 in the communication device 30 shown in Figure 3 calling the application code stored in the storage 303, and this application does not impose any restrictions on this.

本申请上文中提到的各个实施例之间在方案不矛盾的情况下,均可以进行结合,不作限制。The various embodiments mentioned above in this application can be combined without contradiction, and no limitation is imposed.

上述主要从终端、RAN节点和核心网网元之间交互的角度对本申请提供的方案进行了介绍。相应的,本申请还提供了通信装置,该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的终端,或者包含上述终端的装置,或者为可用于终端的部件;或者,该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的RAN节点,或者包含上述RAN节点的装置,或者为可用于RAN节点的部件;或者,该通信装置可以为上述方法实施例中的核心网网元,或者包含上述核心网网元的装置,或者为可用于核心网网元的部件。可以理解的是,上述终端或者RAN节点或者核心网网元等为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和/或软件模块。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法操作,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The above mainly describes the solution provided in this application from the perspective of the interaction between the terminal, RAN node, and core network element. Correspondingly, this application also provides a communication device, which can be the terminal in the above method embodiments, or a device containing the terminal, or a component usable in the terminal; or, the communication device can be the RAN node in the above method embodiments, or a device containing the RAN node, or a component usable in the RAN node; or, the communication device can be the core network element in the above method embodiments, or a device containing the core network element, or a component usable in the core network element. It is understood that the above-mentioned terminal, RAN node, or core network element, etc., include hardware structures and/or software modules corresponding to the execution of each function in order to achieve the above functions. Those skilled in the art should readily recognize that, in conjunction with the unit and algorithm operations of the various examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein, this application can be implemented in hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a function is executed by hardware or by computer software driving hardware depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Those skilled in the art can use different methods to implement the described functions for each specific application, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.

本申请可以根据上述方法示例对终端或RAN节点或核心网网元进行功能模块的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。可以理解的是,本申请中对模块的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。This application can divide terminals, RAN nodes, or core network elements into functional modules based on the above method examples. For example, each function can be divided into its own functional module, or two or more functions can be integrated into one processing module. The integrated module can be implemented in hardware or as a software functional module. It is understood that the module division in this application is illustrative and only represents one logical functional division; other division methods may be used in actual implementation.

比如,以采用集成的方式划分各个功能模块的情况下,图7示出了一种通信装置70的结构示意图。通信装置70包括处理模块701和接口模块702。处理模块701,也可以称为处理单元用于执行除了收发操作之外的操作,例如可以是处理电路或者处理器等。接口模块702,也可以称为接口单元,用于执行收发操作,例如可以是接口电路,收发机,收发器或者通信接口等。For example, when functional modules are integrated, Figure 7 shows a schematic diagram of a communication device 70. The communication device 70 includes a processing module 701 and an interface module 702. The processing module 701, also called a processing unit, is used to perform operations other than transmission and reception; for example, it can be a processing circuit or a processor. The interface module 702, also called an interface unit, is used to perform transmission and reception operations; for example, it can be an interface circuit, a transceiver, a transceiver unit, or a communication interface.

在一些实施例中,该通信装置70还可以包括存储模块(图7中未示出),用于存储程序指令和数据。In some embodiments, the communication device 70 may further include a storage module (not shown in FIG. 7) for storing program instructions and data.

在一些实施例中,该通信装置70还可以包括AI模块(图7中未示出),用于实现AI相关功能。AI模块可以通过软件、硬件或软硬件结合的方式实现AI功能。例如,AI模块包括RIC模块。可选的,AI模块和存储模块集成在一个模块上,或者AI模块和接口模块702集成在一个模块上。In some embodiments, the communication device 70 may further include an AI module (not shown in FIG. 7) for implementing AI-related functions. The AI module can implement AI functions through software, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware. For example, the AI module includes an RIC module. Optionally, the AI module and the storage module are integrated into one module, or the AI module and the interface module 702 are integrated into one module.

示例性地,通信装置70用于实现核心网网元的功能。通信装置70例如为图4所示的实施例所述的核心网网元。For example, the communication device 70 is used to implement the functions of a core network element. The communication device 70 is, for example, the core network element described in the embodiment shown in FIG4.

其中,处理模块701,用于感知终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生变化。例如,处理模块701可以用于执行S401。The processing module 701 is used to sense a change in at least one of the terminal's position or the terminal's movement speed. For example, the processing module 701 can be used to execute S401.

接口模块702,用于向终端或RAN节点发送终端状态信息。其中,终端状态信息指示终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生变化,终端状态信息用于确定用于小区切换的测量信息。例如,接口模块702可以用于执行S402。Interface module 702 is used to send terminal status information to the terminal or RAN node. The terminal status information indicates a change in at least one of the terminal's position or its speed, and is used to determine measurement information for cell handover. For example, interface module 702 can be used to execute S402.

在一种可能的实现方式中,测量信息包括以下至少一项:测量周期信息、测量事件的参数信息或第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示是否停止测量。In one possible implementation, the measurement information includes at least one of the following: measurement cycle information, parameter information of the measurement event, or first indication information, wherein the first indication information indicates whether to stop the measurement.

在一种可能的实现方式中,接口模块702,还用于接收来自RAN节点的第一信息。其中,第一信息指示RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息,RAN节点管理的小区包括第一小区,第一小区为终端的服务小区,或者服务小区的邻区。In one possible implementation, the interface module 702 is further configured to receive first information from the RAN node. The first information indicates coverage information of cells managed by the RAN node, including a first cell, which is either the serving cell of the terminal or a neighboring cell of the serving cell.

在一种可能的实现方式中,处理模块701,还用于根据第一信息构建感知地图,感知地图用于确定终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项。In one possible implementation, the processing module 701 is further configured to construct a perception map based on the first information, the perception map being used to determine at least one of the terminal's position or the terminal's movement speed.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端的位置发生变化包括以下至少一项:终端从一个小区的中心向小区的边缘移动,终端从一个小区的边缘向小区的中心移动,终端离开服务小区的覆盖范围,终端进入第一区域,或者,终端的服务小区的覆盖范围发生变化;其中,第一区域由多个小区覆盖。In one possible implementation, a change in the terminal's location includes at least one of the following: the terminal moves from the center of a cell to the edge of the cell; the terminal moves from the edge of a cell to the center of the cell; the terminal leaves the coverage area of the serving cell; the terminal enters a first area; or the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell changes; wherein the first area is covered by multiple cells.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端的位置为终端与RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置。In one possible implementation, the terminal's location is relative to the cell managed by the RAN node.

当用于实现核心网网元的功能时,关于通信装置70所能实现的其他功能,可参考图4所示的实施例的相关介绍,不多赘述。When used to implement the functions of core network elements, other functions that the communication device 70 can implement can be referred to the relevant description of the embodiment shown in FIG4, which will not be elaborated further.

或者,示例性地,通信装置70用于实现网络节点的功能。通信装置70例如为图4所示的实施例的网络节点。其中,网络节点可以是RAN节点或终端。Alternatively, by way of example, the communication device 70 is used to implement the functions of a network node. The communication device 70 is, for example, a network node in the embodiment shown in FIG4. The network node may be a RAN node or a terminal.

其中,接口模块702,用于获取网络侧感知的终端状态信息。其中,终端状态信息指示终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生变化。例如,接口模块702可以用于执行S402。处理模块701,用于根据终端状态信息确定用于小区切换的测量信息。例如,处理模块701可以用于执行S403。The interface module 702 is used to acquire terminal status information sensed by the network side. The terminal status information indicates a change in at least one of the terminal's location or its speed. For example, the interface module 702 can be used to execute S402. The processing module 701 is used to determine measurement information for cell handover based on the terminal status information. For example, the processing module 701 can be used to execute S403.

在一种可能的实现方式中,测量信息包括以下至少一项:测量周期信息、测量事件的参数信息或第一指示信息,第一指示信息指示是否停止测量。In one possible implementation, the measurement information includes at least one of the following: measurement cycle information, parameter information of the measurement event, or first indication information, wherein the first indication information indicates whether to stop the measurement.

在一种可能的实现方式中,接口模块702,具体用于接收来自核心网网元的终端状态信息。In one possible implementation, the interface module 702 is specifically used to receive terminal status information from core network elements.

在一种可能的实现方式中,接口模块702,还用于向终端发送第二信息,第二信息指示确定的用于小区切换的测量信息。In one possible implementation, the interface module 702 is further configured to send second information to the terminal, the second information indicating the determined measurement information for cell handover.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端的位置发生变化包括以下至少一项:终端从一个小区的中心向小区的边缘移动,终端从一个小区的边缘向小区的中心移动,终端离开服务小区的覆盖范围,终端进入第一区域,或者,终端的服务小区的覆盖范围发生变化;其中,第一区域由多个小区覆盖。In one possible implementation, a change in the terminal's location includes at least one of the following: the terminal moves from the center of a cell to the edge of the cell; the terminal moves from the edge of a cell to the center of the cell; the terminal leaves the coverage area of the serving cell; the terminal enters a first area; or the coverage area of the terminal's serving cell changes; wherein the first area is covered by multiple cells.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端的位置为终端与RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置。In one possible implementation, the terminal's location is relative to the cell managed by the RAN node.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端状态信息包括终端的标识符。In one possible implementation, the terminal state information includes the terminal's identifier.

当用于实现网节点的功能时,关于通信装置70所能实现的其他功能,可参考图4所示的实施例的相关介绍,不多赘述。When used to implement the functions of a network node, other functions that the communication device 70 can implement can be referred to the relevant description of the embodiment shown in FIG4, which will not be elaborated further.

示例性地,通信装置70用于实现核心网网元的功能。通信装置70例如为图5所示的实施例所述的核心网网元。For example, the communication device 70 is used to implement the functions of a core network element. The communication device 70 is, for example, the core network element described in the embodiment shown in FIG5.

其中,接口模块702,用于接收来自第一RAN节点的小区切换信息。其中,小区切换信息包括将终端切换至第一小区的条件信息。例如,接口模块702可以用于执行S501。The interface module 702 is used to receive cell handover information from the first RAN node. This cell handover information includes conditions for handing the terminal to the first cell. For example, the interface module 702 can be used to execute S501.

处理模块701,用于确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量。例如,处理模块701可以用于执行S502。Processing module 701 is used to determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell. For example, processing module 701 can be used to execute S502.

接口模块702,还用于根据小区切换信息和终端针对第一小区的信号质量,向第一RAN节点发送第一信息。其中,第一信息用于终端进行小区切换。例如,接口模块702,用于可以用于执行S503。Interface module 702 is further configured to send first information to the first RAN node based on cell handover information and the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell. The first information is used by the terminal to perform cell handover. For example, interface module 702 can be used to execute S503.

在一种可能的实现方式中,处理模块701,具体用于确定终端的位置,并根据终端的位置和第一小区的覆盖信息确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量。In one possible implementation, the processing module 701 is specifically used to determine the location of the terminal and determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell based on the location of the terminal and the coverage information of the first cell.

在一种可能的实现方式中,接口模块702,还用于接收来自第二RAN节点的第二信息。其中,第二信息用于指示第二RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息,第二RAN节点管理的小区包括第一小区。In one possible implementation, the interface module 702 is further configured to receive second information from the second RAN node. The second information indicates coverage information of cells managed by the second RAN node, including the first cell.

在一种可能的实现方式中,处理模块701,还用于根据第二信息构建感知地图,感知地图用于确定终端针对第一小区的信号质量。In one possible implementation, the processing module 701 is further configured to construct a perception map based on the second information, the perception map being used to determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息包括以下至少一项:第一指示信息,终端针对第一小区的信号质量或测量事件的信息;第一指示信息指示将终端切换至第一小区。In one possible implementation, the first information includes at least one of the following: first indication information, information about the signal quality or measurement events of the terminal for the first cell; the first indication information instructing the terminal to switch to the first cell.

在一种可能的实现方式中,测量事件是根据终端的位置确定的。In one possible implementation, the measurement event is determined based on the location of the terminal.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端的位置为终端与第一RAN节点和/或第二RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置。In one possible implementation, the terminal's location is the relative position of the terminal to the cell managed by the first RAN node and/or the second RAN node.

当用于实现核心网网元的功能时,关于通信装置70所能实现的其他功能,可参考图5所示的实施例的相关介绍,不多赘述。When used to implement the functions of core network elements, other functions that the communication device 70 can implement can be referred to the relevant description of the embodiment shown in FIG5, which will not be elaborated further.

或者,示例性地,通信装置70用于实现第一RAN节点的功能。通信装置70例如为图5所示的实施例的第一RAN节点。Alternatively, by way of example, communication device 70 is used to implement the functions of a first RAN node. Communication device 70 is, for example, the first RAN node of the embodiment shown in FIG5.

其中,接口模块702,用于向核心网网元发送小区切换信息。其中,小区切换信息包括将终端切换至第一小区的条件信息。例如,接口模块702可以用于执行S501。The interface module 702 is used to send cell handover information to the core network elements. This cell handover information includes conditions for switching the terminal to the first cell. For example, the interface module 702 can be used to execute S501.

接口模块702,还用于接收来自核心网网元的第一信息,第一信息指示将终端切换至第一小区,第一信息是根据小区切换信息和核心网网元确定的终端针对第一小区的信号质量确定的。例如,接口模块702可以用于执行S503。Interface module 702 is also used to receive first information from a core network element, the first information indicating that the terminal should be switched to a first cell, the first information being determined based on cell handover information and the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell as determined by the core network element. For example, interface module 702 can be used to execute S503.

处理模块701,用于根据第一信息确定是否将终端切换至第一小区。The processing module 701 is used to determine whether to switch the terminal to the first cell based on the first information.

在一种可能的实现方式中,接口模块702,还用于向核心网网元发送第三信息;第三信息用于指示第一RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息。In one possible implementation, the interface module 702 is also used to send third information to the core network element; the third information is used to indicate the coverage information of the cell managed by the first RAN node.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息包括以下至少一项:第一指示信息,终端针对第一小区的信号质量或测量事件的信息;第一指示信息指示将终端切换至第一小区。In one possible implementation, the first information includes at least one of the following: first indication information, information about the signal quality or measurement events of the terminal for the first cell; the first indication information instructing the terminal to switch to the first cell.

当用于实现终端的功能时,关于通信装置70所能实现的其他功能,可参考图5所示的实施例的相关介绍,不多赘述。When used to implement the functions of a terminal, other functions that the communication device 70 can implement can be referred to the relevant description of the embodiment shown in FIG5, which will not be elaborated further.

示例性地,通信装置70用于实现第二RAN节点的功能。通信装置70例如为图6所示的实施例所述的第二RAN节点。For example, the communication device 70 is used to implement the functions of the second RAN node. The communication device 70 is, for example, the second RAN node described in the embodiment shown in FIG6.

其中,接口模块702,用于向第一RAN节点发送第一信息。其中,第一信息指示以下至少一项:第一小区的第一波束或终端针对第一RAN节点的定时提前量。第一RAN节点管理的小区包括第一小区,第一小区为终端切换的目标小区,第一波束用于终端切换至第一小区后与第一小区通信,定时提前量用于终端切换至第一小区后进行上行同步。第一信息是根据第二信息确定的,第二信息包括以下至少一项:终端对第一小区的测量结果、终端的位置信息或终端的运动速度。例如,接口模块702可以用于执行S601。Interface module 702 is used to send first information to the first RAN node. The first information indicates at least one of the following: a first beam of the first cell or a timing advance of the terminal to the first RAN node. The cells managed by the first RAN node include the first cell, which is the target cell for terminal handover. The first beam is used for communication with the first cell after handover, and the timing advance is used for uplink synchronization after handover. The first information is determined based on second information, which includes at least one of the following: the terminal's measurement result of the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's movement speed. For example, interface module 702 can be used to execute S601.

在一种可能的实现方式中,接口模块702,还用于获取感知信息,感知信息包括终端的位置信息,或者感知信息包括终端的位置信息和终端的运动速度。In one possible implementation, the interface module 702 is also used to acquire sensing information, which includes the terminal's location information, or the sensing information includes the terminal's location information and the terminal's movement speed.

在一种可能的实现方式中,定时提前量的数量为多个,多个定时提前量中任意一个定时提前量与第一小区的一个参考点对应,接口模块702,还用于接收来自第一RAN节点的第三信息,第三信息指示第一定时提前量,多个定时提前量包括第一定时提前量。In one possible implementation, there are multiple timing advances, and any one of the multiple timing advances corresponds to a reference point of the first cell. The interface module 702 is also used to receive third information from the first RAN node, the third information indicating the first timing advance, and the multiple timing advances include the first timing advance.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第一波束的数量为多个,多个第一波束中任意一个第一波束与第一小区中的一个参考点对应。In one possible implementation, there are multiple first beams, and any one of the multiple first beams corresponds to a reference point in the first cell.

在一种可能的实现方式中,处理模块701,用于根据第一RAN节点管理的小区的覆盖信息构建感知地图,感知地图用于确定终端的位置或终端的运动速度中的至少一项。处理模块701,还用于根据感知地图确定第一波束或定时提前量中的一项或多项。In one possible implementation, processing module 701 is configured to construct a perception map based on coverage information of the cell managed by the first RAN node, the perception map being used to determine at least one of the terminal's location or the terminal's movement speed. Processing module 701 is also configured to determine one or more of a first beam or timing advance based on the perception map.

在一种可能的实现方式中,接口模块702,还用于接收来自核心网网元的第四信息,第四信息指示以下至少一项:第一波束或定时提前量。In one possible implementation, the interface module 702 is further configured to receive fourth information from the core network element, the fourth information indicating at least one of the following: a first beam or timing advance.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端的位置为终端与第一RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置。In one possible implementation, the terminal's location is the relative position of the terminal to the cell managed by the first RAN node.

在一种可能的实现方式中,接口模块702,还用于接收来自终端的测量结果。In one possible implementation, the interface module 702 is also used to receive measurement results from the terminal.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息承载于切换请求消息中。In one possible implementation, the first information is carried in the handover request message.

当用于实现第二RAN节点的功能时,关于通信装置70所能实现的其他功能,可参考图6所示的实施例的相关介绍,不多赘述。When used to implement the functions of the second RAN node, other functions that the communication device 70 can implement can be referred to the relevant description of the embodiment shown in FIG6, which will not be elaborated further.

或者,示例性地,通信装置70用于实现第一RAN节点的功能。通信装置70例如为图6所示的实施例的第一RAN节点。Alternatively, by way of example, communication device 70 is used to implement the functions of a first RAN node. Communication device 70 is, for example, the first RAN node of the embodiment shown in FIG6.

其中,接口模块702,用于接收第一信息。其中,第一信息指示以下至少一项:第一小区的第一波束或终端针对第一RAN节点的定时提前量。第一RAN节点管理的小区包括第一小区,第一小区为终端切换的目标小区,第一波束用于终端切换至第一小区后与终端通信,定时提前量用于终端切换至第一小区后进行上行同步,第一信息是根据第二信息确定的,第二信息包括以下至少一项:终端对第一小区的测量结果、终端的位置信息或终端的运动速度。例如,接口模块702可以用于执行S601。Interface module 702 is used to receive first information. The first information indicates at least one of the following: a first beam of a first cell or a timing advance of the terminal for a first RAN node. The cells managed by the first RAN node include the first cell, which is the target cell for terminal handover. The first beam is used for communication after the terminal hands over to the first cell, and the timing advance is used for uplink synchronization after the terminal hands over to the first cell. The first information is determined based on second information, which includes at least one of the following: the terminal's measurement results for the first cell, the terminal's location information, or the terminal's movement speed. For example, interface module 702 can be used to execute S601.

处理模块701,用于在终端切换至第一小区后,根据第一信息与终端通信。例如,接口模块702可以用于执行S602。The processing module 701 is used to communicate with the terminal based on the first information after the terminal switches to the first cell. For example, the interface module 702 can be used to execute S602.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息指示第一波束,处理模块701,具体用于通过第一波束与终端通信。In one possible implementation, the first information indicates the first beam, and the processing module 701 is specifically used to communicate with the terminal through the first beam.

在一种可能的实现方式中,接口模块702,具体用于接收来自第二RAN节点或核心网网元的第一信息。In one possible implementation, the interface module 702 is specifically used to receive first information from the second RAN node or core network element.

在一种可能的实现方式中,定时提前量的数量为多个,多个定时提前量中任意一个定时提前量与第一小区的一个参考点对应,接口模块702,还用于发送第三信息,第三信息指示第一定时提前量;多个定时提前量包括第一定时提前量。In one possible implementation, there are multiple timing advances, and any one of the multiple timing advances corresponds to a reference point of the first cell. The interface module 702 is also used to send third information, which indicates the first timing advance. The multiple timing advances include the first timing advance.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第一波束的数量为多个,多个第一波束中任意一个第一波束与第一小区中的一个参考点对应。In one possible implementation, there are multiple first beams, and any one of the multiple first beams corresponds to a reference point in the first cell.

在一种可能的实现方式中,终端的位置为终端与第一RAN节点管理的小区的相对位置。In one possible implementation, the terminal's location is the relative position of the terminal to the cell managed by the first RAN node.

在一种可能的实现方式中,第一信息承载于切换请求消息中。In one possible implementation, the first information is carried in the handover request message.

当用于实现第一RAN节点的功能时,关于通信装置70所能实现的其他功能,可参考图6所示的实施例的相关介绍,不多赘述。When used to implement the functions of the first RAN node, other functions that the communication device 70 can implement can be referred to the relevant description of the embodiment shown in FIG6, which will not be elaborated further.

在一个简单的实施例中,本领域的技术人员可以想到通信装置70可以采用图3所示的形式。比如,图3中的处理器301可以通过调用存储器303中存储的计算机执行指令,使得通信装置70执行上述实施例中所述的方法。In a simplified embodiment, those skilled in the art will recognize that the communication device 70 can take the form shown in FIG3. For example, the processor 301 in FIG3 can invoke computer execution instructions stored in memory 303 to cause the communication device 70 to perform the methods described in the above embodiments.

示例性的,图7中的处理模块701和接口模块702的功能/实现过程可以通过图3中的处理器301调用存储器303中存储的计算机执行指令来实现。或者,图7中的处理模块701的功能/实现过程可以通过图3中的处理器301调用存储器303中存储的计算机执行指令来实现,图7中的接口模块702的功能/实现过程可以通过图3中的收发器302来实现。For example, the functions/implementation processes of the processing module 701 and interface module 702 in FIG7 can be implemented by the processor 301 in FIG3 calling computer execution instructions stored in memory 303. Alternatively, the functions/implementation processes of the processing module 701 in FIG7 can be implemented by the processor 301 in FIG3 calling computer execution instructions stored in memory 303, and the functions/implementation processes of the interface module 702 in FIG7 can be implemented by the transceiver 302 in FIG3.

可以理解的是,以上模块或单元的一个或多个可以软件、硬件或二者结合来实现。当以上任一模块或单元以软件实现的时候,所述软件以计算机程序指令的方式存在,并被存储在存储器中,处理器可以用于执行所述程序指令并实现以上方法流程。该处理器可以内置于片上系统(system-on-a-chip,SoC)或ASIC,也可是一个独立的半导体芯片。该处理器内处理用于执行软件指令以进行运算或处理的核外,还可进一步包括必要的硬件加速器,如现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)、可编程逻辑器件(programmable logic device,PLD)或者实现专用逻辑运算的逻辑电路。It is understood that one or more of the above modules or units can be implemented by software, hardware, or a combination of both. When any of the above modules or units are implemented by software, the software exists as computer program instructions and is stored in memory. The processor can be used to execute the program instructions and implement the above method flow. The processor can be built into a system-on-a-chip (SoC) or ASIC, or it can be a separate semiconductor chip. In addition to the core that executes the software instructions for computation or processing, the processor may further include necessary hardware accelerators, such as field-programmable gate arrays (FPGAs), programmable logic devices (PLDs), or logic circuits that implement dedicated logic operations.

当以上模块或单元以硬件实现的时候,该硬件可以是CPU、微处理器、数字信号处理(digital signal processing,DSP)芯片、微控制单元(microcontroller unit,MCU)、人工智能处理器、ASIC、SoC、FPGA、PLD、专用数字电路、硬件加速器或非集成的分立器件中的任一个或任一组合,其可以运行必要的软件或不依赖于软件以执行以上方法流程。When the above modules or units are implemented in hardware, the hardware can be any one or any combination of a CPU, microprocessor, digital signal processing (DSP) chip, microcontroller unit (MCU), artificial intelligence processor, ASIC, SoC, FPGA, PLD, application-specific digital circuit, hardware accelerator, or non-integrated discrete device, which can run the necessary software or perform the above method flow independently of software.

可选的,本申请还提供了一种芯片系统,包括:至少一个处理器和接口,该至少一个处理器通过接口与存储器耦合,当该至少一个处理器执行存储器中的计算机程序或指令时,使得上述任一方法实施例中的方法被执行。在一种可能的实现方式中,该芯片系统还包括存储器。可选的,该芯片系统可以由芯片构成,也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件,本申请对此不作具体限定。Optionally, this application also provides a chip system, including: at least one processor and an interface, wherein the at least one processor is coupled to a memory via the interface, and when the at least one processor executes a computer program or instructions in the memory, the method in any of the above method embodiments is executed. In one possible implementation, the chip system further includes a memory. Optionally, the chip system may be composed of chips or may include chips and other discrete devices; this application does not specifically limit this.

可选的,本申请还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质。上述方法实施例中的全部或者部分流程可以由计算机程序来指令相关的硬件完成,该程序可存储于上述计算机可读存储介质中,该程序在执行时,可包括如上述各方法实施例的流程。计算机可读存储介质可以是前述任一实施例的通信装置的内部存储单元,例如通信装置的硬盘或内存。上述计算机可读存储介质也可以是上述通信装置的外部存储设备,例如上述通信装置上配备的插接式硬盘,智能存储卡(smart media card,SMC),安全数字(secure digital,SD)卡,闪存卡(flash card)等。进一步地,上述计算机可读存储介质还可以既包括上述通信装置的内部存储单元也包括外部存储设备。上述计算机可读存储介质用于存储上述计算机程序以及上述通信装置所需的其他程序和数据。上述计算机可读存储介质还可以用于暂时地存储已经输出或者将要输出的数据。Optionally, this application also provides a computer-readable storage medium. All or part of the processes in the above method embodiments can be implemented by a computer program instructing related hardware. This program can be stored in the aforementioned computer-readable storage medium. When executed, the program can include the processes of the above method embodiments. The computer-readable storage medium can be an internal storage unit of the communication device in any of the foregoing embodiments, such as the hard disk or memory of the communication device. The aforementioned computer-readable storage medium can also be an external storage device of the communication device, such as a plug-in hard disk, smart media card (SMC), secure digital (SD) card, flash card, etc., equipped on the communication device. Further, the aforementioned computer-readable storage medium can include both internal storage units and external storage devices of the communication device. The aforementioned computer-readable storage medium is used to store the aforementioned computer program and other programs and data required by the communication device. The aforementioned computer-readable storage medium can also be used to temporarily store data that has been output or will be output.

可选的,本申请还提供了一种计算机程序产品。上述方法实施例中的全部或者部分流程可以由计算机程序来指令相关的硬件完成,该程序可存储于上述计算机程序产品中,该程序在执行时,可包括如上述各方法实施例的流程。Optionally, this application also provides a computer program product. All or part of the processes in the above method embodiments can be executed by a computer program instructing related hardware. This program can be stored in the above computer program product, and when executed, it can include the processes described in the above method embodiments.

可选的,本申请还提供了一种计算机指令。上述方法实施例中的全部或者部分流程可以由计算机指令来指令相关的硬件(如计算机、处理器、终端、RAN节点或核心网网元等)完成。该程序可被存储于上述计算机可读存储介质中或上述计算机程序产品中。Optionally, this application also provides computer instructions. All or part of the processes in the above method embodiments can be executed by computer instructions instructing related hardware (such as computers, processors, terminals, RAN nodes, or core network elements). The program can be stored in the aforementioned computer-readable storage medium or the aforementioned computer program product.

可选的,本申请还提供了一种通信系统,包括:图4所示方法中的核心网网元和网络节点。Optionally, this application also provides a communication system, including: core network elements and network nodes as shown in Figure 4.

可选的,本申请还提供了一种通信系统,包括:图5所示方法中的核心网网元和第一RAN节点。Optionally, this application also provides a communication system, including: the core network element and the first RAN node in the method shown in Figure 5.

可选的,本申请还提供了一种通信系统,包括:图6所示方法中的第一RAN节点和第二RAN节点。Optionally, this application also provides a communication system, including: a first RAN node and a second RAN node as shown in the method of FIG6.

通过以上的实施方式的描述,所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为描述的方便和简洁,仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成,即将装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能模块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。Through the above description of the embodiments, those skilled in the art can clearly understand that, for the sake of convenience and brevity, only the division of the above functional modules is used as an example. In actual applications, the above functions can be assigned to different functional modules as needed, that is, the internal structure of the device can be divided into different functional modules to complete all or part of the functions described above.

在本申请所提供的几个实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的装置和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述模块或单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个装置,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the several embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed apparatus and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the apparatus embodiments described above are merely illustrative; for instance, the division of modules or units is only a logical functional division, and in actual implementation, there may be other division methods. For example, multiple units or components may be combined or integrated into another device, or some features may be ignored or not executed. Furthermore, the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be through some interfaces; the indirect coupling or communication connection between devices or units may be electrical, mechanical, or other forms.

所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是一个物理单元或多个物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个不同地方。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separate. A component shown as a unit can be one or more physical units; that is, it can be located in one place or distributed in multiple different locations. Some or all of the units can be selected to achieve the purpose of this embodiment according to actual needs.

另外,在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。Furthermore, the functional units in the various embodiments of this application can be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit can exist physically separately, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit. The integrated unit can be implemented in hardware or as a software functional unit.

以上所述,仅为本申请的具体实施方式,但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此,任何在本申请揭露的技术范围内的变化或替换,都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此,本申请的保护范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。The above description is merely a specific embodiment of this application, but the scope of protection of this application is not limited thereto. Any changes or substitutions within the technical scope disclosed in this application should be included within the scope of protection of this application. Therefore, the scope of protection of this application should be determined by the scope of the claims.

Claims (29)

一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes: 感知终端的位置或所述终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生变化;At least one of the sensing terminal's position or the terminal's speed of movement changes; 向所述终端或无线接入网节点发送终端状态信息,所述终端状态信息指示所述终端的位置或所述终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生变化,所述终端状态信息用于确定用于小区切换的测量信息。Terminal status information is sent to the terminal or a wireless access network node, the terminal status information indicating that at least one of the terminal's position or the terminal's movement speed has changed, and the terminal status information is used to determine measurement information for cell handover. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述测量信息包括以下至少一项:测量周期信息、测量事件的参数信息或第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示是否停止测量。The method according to claim 1, wherein the measurement information includes at least one of the following: measurement cycle information, parameter information of measurement events, or first indication information, wherein the first indication information indicates whether to stop the measurement. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 1 or 2, characterized in that the method further comprises: 接收来自所述无线接入网节点的第一信息;所述第一信息指示所述无线接入网节点管理的小区的覆盖信息,所述无线接入网节点管理的小区包括第一小区,所述第一小区为所述终端的服务小区,或者所述服务小区的邻区。The terminal receives first information from the radio access network node; the first information indicates the coverage information of the cells managed by the radio access network node, the cells managed by the radio access network node include a first cell, the first cell being the serving cell of the terminal, or a neighboring cell of the serving cell. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 3, characterized in that the method further comprises: 根据所述第一信息构建感知地图,所述感知地图用于确定所述终端的位置或所述终端的运动速度中的至少一项。A perception map is constructed based on the first information, and the perception map is used to determine at least one of the terminal's position or the terminal's movement speed. 根据权利要求1-4中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 1-4, characterized in that, 所述终端的位置发生变化包括以下至少一项:所述终端从一个小区的中心向所述小区的边缘移动,所述终端从一个小区的边缘向所述小区的中心移动,所述终端离开服务小区的覆盖范围,所述终端进入第一区域,或者,所述终端的服务小区的覆盖范围发生变化;其中,所述第一区域由多个小区覆盖。The change in the location of the terminal includes at least one of the following: the terminal moves from the center of a cell to the edge of the cell; the terminal moves from the edge of a cell to the center of the cell; the terminal leaves the coverage area of the serving cell; the terminal enters a first area; or the coverage area of the serving cell of the terminal changes; wherein the first area is covered by multiple cells. 根据权利要求1-5中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 1-5 is characterized in that, 所述终端的位置为所述终端与所述无线接入网节点管理的小区的相对位置。The location of the terminal is the relative position of the terminal to the cell managed by the wireless access network node. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes: 获取网络侧感知的终端状态信息,所述终端状态信息指示终端的位置或所述终端的运动速度中的至少一项发生变化;Obtain terminal status information sensed by the network side, wherein the terminal status information indicates that at least one of the terminal's position or the terminal's movement speed has changed; 根据所述终端状态信息确定用于小区切换的测量信息。The measurement information used for cell handover is determined based on the terminal status information. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,其特征在于,所述测量信息包括以下至少一项:测量周期信息、测量事件的参数信息或第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息指示是否停止测量。The method according to claim 7, wherein the measurement information includes at least one of the following: measurement cycle information, parameter information of measurement events, or first indication information, wherein the first indication information indicates whether to stop the measurement. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述获取网络侧感知的终端状态信息,包括:According to the method of claim 7 or 8, the step of obtaining the terminal status information sensed by the network side includes: 接收来自核心网网元的所述终端状态信息。Receive the terminal status information from the core network element. 根据权利要求7-9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 7-9, characterized in that the method further comprises: 向所述终端发送第二信息,所述第二信息指示确定的用于小区切换的测量信息。A second message is sent to the terminal, the second message indicating the determined measurement information for cell handover. 根据权利要求7-10中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 7-10, characterized in that, 所述终端的位置发生变化包括以下至少一项:所述终端从一个小区的中心向所述小区的边缘移动,所述终端从一个小区的边缘向所述小区的中心移动,所述终端离开服务小区的覆盖范围,所述终端进入第一区域,或者,所述终端的服务小区的覆盖范围发生变化;其中,所述第一区域由多个小区覆盖。The change in the location of the terminal includes at least one of the following: the terminal moves from the center of a cell to the edge of the cell; the terminal moves from the edge of a cell to the center of the cell; the terminal leaves the coverage area of the serving cell; the terminal enters a first area; or the coverage area of the serving cell of the terminal changes; wherein the first area is covered by multiple cells. 根据权利要求7-11中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 7-11, characterized in that, 所述终端的位置为所述终端与所述无线接入网节点管理的小区的相对位置。The location of the terminal is the relative position of the terminal to the cell managed by the wireless access network node. 根据权利要求7-12中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to any one of claims 7-12 is characterized in that, 所述终端状态信息包括所述终端的标识符。The terminal status information includes the terminal's identifier. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,应用于核心网网元,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that it is applied to a core network element, the method comprising: 接收来自第一无线接入网节点的小区切换信息,所述小区切换信息包括将终端切换至第一小区的条件信息;Receive cell handover information from a first radio access network node, the cell handover information including condition information for handing the terminal to the first cell; 确定所述终端针对所述第一小区的信号质量;Determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell; 根据所述小区切换信息和所述终端针对所述第一小区的信号质量,向所述第一无线接入网节点发送第一信息,所述第一信息用于所述终端进行小区切换。Based on the cell handover information and the signal quality of the first cell, the terminal sends first information to the first radio access network node, and the first information is used by the terminal to perform cell handover. 根据权利要求14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述确定所述终端针对所述第一小区的信号质量,包括:According to the method of claim 14, the step of determining the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell includes: 确定所述终端的位置;Determine the location of the terminal; 根据所述终端的位置和所述第一小区的覆盖信息确定所述终端针对所述第一小区的信号质量。The signal quality of the terminal for the first cell is determined based on the location of the terminal and the coverage information of the first cell. 根据权利要求15所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 15, characterized in that the method further comprises: 接收来自第二无线接入网节点的第二信息;所述第二信息用于指示所述第二无线接入网节点管理的小区的覆盖信息,所述第二无线接入网节点管理的小区包括所述第一小区。Receive second information from a second radio access network node; the second information is used to indicate the coverage information of the cell managed by the second radio access network node, the cell managed by the second radio access network node including the first cell. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 16, characterized in that the method further comprises: 根据所述第二信息构建感知地图,所述感知地图用于确定所述终端针对所述第一小区的信号质量。A perception map is constructed based on the second information, and the perception map is used to determine the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell. 根据权利要求14-17中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括以下至少一项:第一指示信息,所述终端针对所述第一小区的信号质量或测量事件的信息;所述第一指示信息指示将所述终端切换至所述第一小区。The method according to any one of claims 14-17, wherein the first information includes at least one of the following: first indication information, information of the terminal regarding signal quality or measurement events of the first cell; the first indication information indicating that the terminal be switched to the first cell. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 18, characterized in that, 所述测量事件是根据所述终端的位置确定的。The measurement event is determined based on the location of the terminal. 根据权利要求15或19所述的方法,其特征在于,The method according to claim 15 or 19, characterized in that, 所述终端的位置为所述终端与所述第一无线接入网节点和/或所述第二无线接入网节点管理的小区的相对位置。The location of the terminal is the relative position of the terminal to the cell managed by the first radio access network node and/or the second radio access network node. 一种通信方法,其特征在于,所述方法包括:A communication method, characterized in that the method includes: 向核心网网元发送小区切换信息,所述小区切换信息包括将终端切换至第一小区的条件信息;Send cell handover information to core network elements, wherein the cell handover information includes condition information for handing the terminal to the first cell; 接收来自所述核心网网元的第一信息,所述第一信息指示将所述终端切换至所述第一小区,所述第一信息是根据所述小区切换信息和所述核心网网元确定的所述终端针对所述第一小区的信号质量确定的;The system receives first information from the core network element, the first information indicating that the terminal should be switched to the first cell, the first information being determined based on the cell switching information and the signal quality of the terminal for the first cell as determined by the core network element; 根据所述第一信息确定是否将所述终端切换至所述第一小区。Based on the first information, determine whether to switch the terminal to the first cell. 根据权利要求21所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法应用于第一无线接入网节点,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 21, wherein the method is applied to a first wireless access network node, and the method further comprises: 向所述核心网网元发送第三信息;所述第三信息用于指示所述第一无线接入网节点管理的小区的覆盖信息。Send third information to the core network element; the third information is used to indicate the coverage information of the cell managed by the first radio access network node. 根据权利要求21或22所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一信息包括以下至少一项:第一指示信息,所述终端针对所述第一小区的信号质量或测量事件的信息;所述第一指示信息指示将所述终端切换至所述第一小区。The method according to claim 21 or 22, wherein the first information includes at least one of the following: first indication information, information of the terminal regarding the signal quality or measurement events of the first cell; the first indication information indicating that the terminal be switched to the first cell. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括用于执行如权利要求1至6中任一项所述方法的单元或模块,或者包括用于执行如权利要求7至13中任一项所述方法的单元或模块,或者包括用于执行如权利要求14至20中任一项所述方法的单元或模块,或者包括用于执行如权利要求21至23中任一项所述方法的单元或模块。A communication device, characterized in that it includes a unit or module for performing the method as described in any one of claims 1 to 6, or includes a unit or module for performing the method as described in any one of claims 7 to 13, or includes a unit or module for performing the method as described in any one of claims 14 to 20, or includes a unit or module for performing the method as described in any one of claims 21 to 23. 一种通信装置,其特征在于,包括:处理器,所述处理器与存储器耦合,所述存储器用于存储程序或指令,当所述程序或指令被所述处理器执行时,使得所述装置执行如权利要求1至6中任一项所述的方法,或者执行如权利要求7至13中任一项所述的方法,或者执行如权利要求14至20中任一项所述的方法,或者执行如权利要求21至23中任一项所述的方法。A communication device, characterized in that it comprises: a processor coupled to a memory for storing programs or instructions, wherein when the programs or instructions are executed by the processor, the device performs the method as described in any one of claims 1 to 6, or the method as described in any one of claims 7 to 13, or the method as described in any one of claims 14 to 20, or the method as described in any one of claims 21 to 23. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其上存储有计算机程序或指令,其特征在于,所述计算机程序或指令被执行时使得计算机执行如权利要求1至6中任一项所述的方法,或者如权利要求7至13中任一项所述的方法,或者如权利要求14至20中任一项所述的方法,或者如权利要求21至23中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium having a computer program or instructions stored thereon, characterized in that, when the computer program or instructions are executed, they cause a computer to perform the method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 6, or the method as claimed in any one of claims 7 to 13, or the method as claimed in any one of claims 14 to 20, or the method as claimed in any one of claims 21 to 23. 一种计算机程序产品,所述计算机程序产品中包括计算机程序代码,其特征在于,当所述计算机程序代码在计算机上运行时,使得计算机实现权利要求1至6中任一项所述的方法,或者实现权利要求7至13中任一项所述的方法,或者实现权利要求14至20中任一项所述的方法,或者实现权利要求21至23中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product comprising computer program code, characterized in that, when the computer program code is run on a computer, it causes the computer to implement the method of any one of claims 1 to 6, or the method of any one of claims 7 to 13, or the method of any one of claims 14 to 20, or the method of any one of claims 21 to 23. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,包括:用于执行如权利要求1至6中任一项所述方法的装置,和/或,用于执行如权利要求7至13中任一项所述方法的装置。A communication system, characterized in that it comprises: means for performing the method as described in any one of claims 1 to 6, and/or means for performing the method as described in any one of claims 7 to 13. 一种通信系统,其特征在于,包括:用于执行如权利要求14至20中任一项所述方法的装置,和/或,用于执行如权利要求21至23中任一项所述方法的装置。A communication system, characterized in that it comprises: means for performing the method as described in any one of claims 14 to 20, and/or means for performing the method as described in any one of claims 21 to 23.
PCT/CN2025/089598 2024-04-26 2025-04-17 Communication method and apparatus Pending WO2025223300A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202410519529.8 2024-04-26
CN202410519529.8A CN120857203A (en) 2024-04-26 2024-04-26 Communication method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025223300A1 true WO2025223300A1 (en) 2025-10-30

Family

ID=97424310

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2025/089598 Pending WO2025223300A1 (en) 2024-04-26 2025-04-17 Communication method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN120857203A (en)
WO (1) WO2025223300A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104602260A (en) * 2013-10-31 2015-05-06 中国移动通信集团江苏有限公司 Heterogeneous network switching method and base station
WO2022082539A1 (en) * 2020-10-21 2022-04-28 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for radio communication
CN115699871A (en) * 2020-08-03 2023-02-03 华为技术有限公司 A communication method and device
CN117202277A (en) * 2022-05-30 2023-12-08 维沃软件技术有限公司 Communication method, device, terminal, network equipment and core network equipment

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN104602260A (en) * 2013-10-31 2015-05-06 中国移动通信集团江苏有限公司 Heterogeneous network switching method and base station
CN115699871A (en) * 2020-08-03 2023-02-03 华为技术有限公司 A communication method and device
WO2022082539A1 (en) * 2020-10-21 2022-04-28 华为技术有限公司 Method and device for radio communication
CN117202277A (en) * 2022-05-30 2023-12-08 维沃软件技术有限公司 Communication method, device, terminal, network equipment and core network equipment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN120857203A (en) 2025-10-28

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11265749B2 (en) Device, method, and computer readable storage medium in wireless communication system
US20210321311A1 (en) Apparatus and method in wireless communication system and computer readable storage medium
CN112787702B (en) Network switching method and device
CN108076488B (en) Method, device and system for cell switching
CN114342456B (en) Measurement method, base station, multimode terminal, communication device, and storage medium
CN115915306A (en) Handover method, communication device, and computer storage medium
WO2021253421A1 (en) Method for accessing satellite, satellite, terminal, communication device, and storage medium
WO2025223300A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN117615444A (en) A timing advance TA determination method, device and system
WO2024243806A1 (en) Communication method, positioning server, access network device, and terminal device
CN120129006B (en) Communication method, communication device, and communication system
WO2021114192A1 (en) Network parameter adjustment method and network management device
WO2025222902A1 (en) Synchronization method and apparatus
WO2025209310A1 (en) Measurement report reporting method and device
WO2025087346A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2025031425A1 (en) Cell handover method and related apparatus
WO2025227920A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2025209115A1 (en) Method for acquiring information of positioning reference unit, and related product
CN120897214A (en) Cell measurement method, cell measurement device, chip system, storage medium and program product
WO2025185495A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN120601938A (en) Communication method and device
WO2025184806A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device
WO2025209588A1 (en) Cell handover method and apparatus, and device, storage medium and program product
CN119545463A (en) Cell switching method and related device
WO2025152037A1 (en) Wireless communication method, terminal device, and network device